Documente Academic
Documente Profesional
Documente Cultură
MT
40.M39 1854
Stlfata,
BJem fork
BENNO LOEWY
1854.1919
The
tlie
original of
tliis
book
is in
restrictions in
http://www.archive.org/details/cu31924022480267
THEORY AND
PRACTICE
MUSICAL COMPOSITION
BY
HEERMAlSr
S.
SAKONI.
CONSERVATORY
OP PARIS.
NEW YOEK:
PUBLISHED BY MASON BROTHEES. 23 PARK ROW.
New
York.
''
bf
MASON BROTHERS,
In the Clerk's Office of the District Court for the Southern District of
New
York,
PUBLISHERS' ADVERTISEMENT.
A. B.
Marx
Gennany
as a writer
upon
great
work
to those
who
lite-
emphatically the
home
of music, would
be superfluous.
It is
thoroughly
scientific,
work of
much
sought after in vain, as to lead to the present translation, which embraces two books,
viz.
:
Book
I.
The Elements
of Musical Composition.
;
Book
II.
with especial
reference to Chorals
(Volkslied.)
The
made from
German
edition,
tion to the
American student,
Ilxtraot
Gentlemen,
Your
polite
my
Messrs.T- Edwards,
thanks.
*****
Sandford,
&
Co., for
which accept
my
warmest
am
you to express
honored
my
work with
my
sincerest thanks,
also yourselves to accept the same, for the very elegant style of the
edition.
AUTHOR'S PREFACE.
The
and comprehensive
of the pu-
the consciousness
and
sensibilities
and immediately
incite
him
to artistic activity.
way
for
it
both are
and
it is
it.
As
bom' of
his
own
free, truth-perspirit,
vaded mind,
of man, so
body
must the
science of
Art continually
from which
it
most
living
and impressive
truths,
way
to bolder
desire for
new
achieve-
my
and
life.
period of
by observation and artistic activity from an early youth, strengthened by a view of the historical deveart,
lopment of
telligent
in-
this principle, as
in
my
first
my
law.
That the
inter-
6
change of theory and
sence, of
traries,
author's preface.
practice, of
law and
still,
liberty, of
though
in reality united,
mated, and
work.
fertile of results,
was
my
principal
aim
in the present
companiments, I consider
it
placed the further development of passes and harmonic figuration after the
for the freer
choral,
by the
I would gladly
ofiFer
to
my
method of teaching
new
however,
is
the insuflSciency of
all
life,
edulife,
life is
office,
;
many
lives
to
always most
whole
limited in
its
may
Often and long enough has the want of this reciprocal action of
doctrine and
felt.
life
Even
in our
own
times have
form
artists or connois-
to
be wanting in
the least
skill for
able composers
who
venture to neglect,
own
skill in
;
execution.
by
their deficiency
W. A.
may
The teacher
himself an
artist,
should
is
be
in
the full vocation, the dexterity, the experience, and the capacity
of the pedagogue.
Seldom
either
its
found or attained,
necessity.
make us
confess
My
the
method of
first
Of pure
necessary
much
is
at first premised as
is
method of
instruction,
and direct
of notes,
him
From
the
first series
its
peculiar
is
familiar with
what
and what
to miss in the
thus preit
will
The
scholar
is
thus
artistic activity,
in the
atmosphere of
active,
The teacher
and
and
fear'
With
sit
at the
often
teacher's side,
who
author's preface.
whom
the
must give
advice, or instruct
;
them how
to proceed with
how
tem of
results.
instruction has
of
the
my
sooner he
the
more
successful, in
scholar, es-
may
be taken up and
him
In
artistic
where
individuality
and
its
subjective sensation
and
voli-
moment
of artistic creation, I do
not hold
it
He
to conquer himself
by
his
own
might.
A vanquished
error is a
progress
TABLE OF CONTENTS.
MUSICAL NOTATION".
PAOa
IHTRODUCTIOK
. .
15
II.
18
19
.
III.
24
38
IV.
V.
VI.
VII.
The Measuring of Tone- relations The Tone Species, Sexes, or Modes The Keys
Keys
. .
VIII. Relation of
.... ....
.
.36
41
44
46
BOOK FIRST.
ELEMENTS OF MtTSICAL COMPOSITION.
PART FIRST.COMPOSITION FOR SINGLE PARTS (MONOPHONIC
COMPOSITION),
Chapter
I.
:
63.
ulation,
The first Formations 1. The Tone-chain, with its Species, 63 ; Tone Reg54 The Major Scale, ih. Analysis of the Scale, 66 3. Rhythmical form; ; ; ;
Retrospection, 59.
1.
Chapter
3.
II.
its
Efficacy, iS.^
Formation of Passages, 63
III.
3.
Chapter
Discovery of New
4.
Periods, 66.
II.
The Duophonic Composition, derived from the Monophonic, 73. The Duophonic Composition, derived from Natural Harmony, 74
it, ii.
;
ner of arriving at
Application, dence,
ib.
ib.
;
3. Application,
ii.
I. ManHarmonic
;
3.
Harmonic Designs, 78
4.
The Cadmce,
79
6.
The
Half-Ca-
Chapter
III.
81.
10
Chapter IV. Chapter V.
TABLE OF COin^KTS;
Compositions of two and three parts, 84
;
Retrospection, 87
Compo^
Composition, 90
Application, 93.
PART THIKD.HARMONY OF
THE.
MAJOR
;
SCALE.
Chapter I. Discovery of the necessary Harmonies, 94, Chapter H. Examination and Justification of the Harmony, 99 A. The Four Voices*, ifi. ; B. The Connection of Chords, 100; C. Harmonic Besi^ns^ ib: ;~ D. Faulty Pro-gressions, 101;
1.
ib.
2.
Quint or Fifth
;
E.
103
F.
The Triad
Chapter TIL The Accompaniment of given Melodies, 107 j A. Limitation to those means which were found in the Ascending Scale, ib.] B. The Descending Scale, 109.
113.
I. Harmonic Designs, 114 A. Development of a Single Chord, ib. ; H, Combination of Major Triads, 115 1. Designs of Nearest Connection, ib. 3. Designs Of Remote Connection, ib. C. The Combination of Minor Triads, and of Minor and Major Triads, 116 D. Harmonic Designs froiA adding the Dominant Chords 117; 1. The Dominant Chord preparing the end, ib. 2. Other Chords in connection with the Dominant Chord, 118; E. Extension of the Harmonic Designs by means of Rhythm, 118 F. Formation of Harmonic Passages or Sequences, 119 Prelude, 120. Chapter II. Freer Harmonization of given Melodies, 122 A. Freer use of Triads B. Free introduction of the Donunant Chord, 125 ib. Freer Treatment of the Dominant Chord, 127 Doubling of intervals in the Dominant Chord, 128 Covered
; ; ;
;
129.
131.
Figuring, 134.
t&.
II.
A.
New
C. Preludes
and Final
ib.
Cadences, 140; D, Avoiding faulty progressions, 141; E. The Diminished Triads, Chapter III. Employment of Inversions, &c., 143. Chapter IV. Close and dispersed Harmony, 144 Retrospection Modulation, 147
;
II.
Formation of the Minor Scale, 149. Harmonization of the Minor Scale, 151
continVfed,
Ninth), 152.
New
Chords, 157
1.
3.
Minor
3.
161.
I.
2.
Modulation from one Key into another, 162 1. The Dominant Chord, The Nona-Chords, 168 3. The Septime Chord, ib. ; 4. The Diminished
; ;
TABLE OF CONTENTS.
Septimo Chord, 169;
7. 5.
11
The Dominant
Triad, 170
The Diminished
Triad,
tft.
6.
The Minor
II.
Triad, 171.
Cmaftek
Introduction of
new means
A.
In
1.
External Characteristics,
;
t.
2.
C. Application
Chapter
III.
Formation of new passages with the aid of Foreign Chords, 186 1. Pas2. Indigenous Passage, 190 3. Successions of Nona; ; ;
Chords, 191;
4.
5.
Successions of derived
The Diminished
;
Septime. Chord,
ib.
199.
Chapter V. General Order of Construction, 201 A. The first perfect Construction of a two-part Composition, ib, ; B. Second two-part Construction, 303 C. Further ex;
D.
The
Chapter VI. Abrhpt Modulation, 207. Chapter VII. Order of Modulation for more extended Compositions,
Phrases, 313.
21Ij Passages of
215.
;
A. Development of Harmony,
ib.
228.
Chapter I. Suspensions from above, 228 Suspensions of fundamental Tones, 334. Chapter II. Suspensions from below, 236 A means of Connection, 238 Fifths niiti gated by Suspensions, 244 Octaves covered by Suspensions, 245. Chapter III. Anticipated Tones, 346.
; ; ;
PART NINTH.THE
Chapter Chapter
B.
I.
PASS,
248.
The
II.
Diatonic Pass, 249 Participant Tone, 360. Chromatic Passes and Assistant-tones, 263; A. The Chromatic
;
Pass,
I'A.
The
Assistant-tone, 256.
III.
Chapter
The
The Superfluous
Triad, 260.
266.
II.
;
B.
The
BOOK SECOND.
THE ACCOMPANIMENT OF GIVEN MELODIES.
iNTRODUCTIOIf, 381.
B.
Summary
Chapter
It.
Disposition of the
Harmony,
297.
12
TABLE OF CONTENTS.
Chapter III. Simple treatment of the Choral, 305. Chapteu IV. Higher treatment of the Choral, 310
B. Application to the Choral, 314
tion,
ib.
;
1.
Technical
A. Tone-repeti310.
B. Fhrase-repetition,
ib.
3. Artistic
Chapter V. The Canlus Firmua in other Voices, 831 A. The Cantus Firmua in the Alto, 322 B. The Cantus Firmus in the Tenor, 333 G. The Cantus Firmus in the
; ;
Bass, 334.
less
i6. j
The Duophonic
treatment,
ii.
2.
The fTriphonio
331.
treatment, 328
B.
330.
Chapter VII.
338.
The
monic
Point, 342
ib.
foreign Tones,
A. The Melodic Point, a.; B. The HarC. The Essential Tones of every Key, 344 D. Admissibility ot . Transposition and Signature, i&. F. Modulation into other
; ;
Keys, 346.
The Ionian Key, 34T. The Mixolydian Key, 349. IV. The Dorian Key, 350. V. The aiolian Key, 352. VI. The Phrygian Key, 354. VIL The Lydian Key, 35S.
II.
IIL
358.
I.
1.
Consideration of Voice-region,
2.
Character of Keys,
Chapter II. Plan of the Harmony, 381; 1. The Measure or the Quantity of the Harmony, ib. 2. Number of accompanying Voices, 364 ; 3. The Form of the Harmony, 366. Chapter III. Harmonic Figuration, 367 Discovery of its Designs, t&. ;1. Monophonic Designs, ib. 3. Duophonic and Polyphonic Designs, 363. Chapter IV. Execution of the Harmonic Figuration, 370 ; A. The Harmonic Point of 1. Retarded Resolution, ib. ; 3. Octave and Quint-Succession, 371; View, ib. B. The Melodic Point of View, ib. 1. Consistency of Execu3. Passing-tones, 373 2. Firm Connection, ib. tion, 373 Chapter V. The Exercise of Harmonic Figuration in Passages and given Melodies, 375 1. Passages rediiced to Harmonic Figuration, t&. ; 2. Accompaniment of given
; ; ; ; ; ;
I ;
Melodies, 377.
Help Tones,
8ic.,
Chapter VII. Introduction of Passes and Help-tones into Figuration, 385 A. FiguraB. Figuration of the Bass, 387 C. Figuration of a tion of the Upper Voice, ib.
; ;
Application, 390.
Chapter
means
to Artistic
Accompaniments,
392.
APPBITDIX,
The Figural
Prelude, 401.
TRANSLATOB.
The
a task of extreme
difficulty to
work of any
that
it
foreign,
The
so thorough a study,
absolutely impossible to do
them
justice in trans-
lating their
works with general terms, which at every step which has induced the Translator
of this
tise,
work
is to
such terms as
may
absolutely ne-
lar didactic
form ; and
if
made
at least as brief as
INTRODUCTION.
" Music
ear,"
is
is
nor
is
Mu-
ear
is
is
most directly
by Music.
Every vibration of
means,
caused by a col-
SOUND.
We
know,
also, that
Music
is
voice, as well as
Flutes,
we
Thus,
of a
Harp more
string.
call it
When we
we must
16
TONE.
We
have, therefore,
many
different tones.
;
The
tones of
those of the
Thus of human
the tones of
we
We
neral ;" for since every voice and every instrument can pro-
it
man's
to
a certain space of
is
DURATION.
We
If
it
finite duration.
we cause
RHYTHM.
Where such regulation
either
sion
we say
is
unrhythmical.
to
formed according
any
17
particular plan, and at the
called a
MELODY.*
A piece of
is
Music can
it
then called
Monophonic,
(for
one voice.)
Or
it
it is
then called
Duophonic
Tetraphonic
voices.)
(for (for
two voices)
four voices)
or Polyphonic (for
many
Each
called
a
.
TOICE
The simultaneously-meeting
must
This relation
is
called
.
HARMONY
And
of all these essentials
:
MUSIC
consist.
FIRST PAET.
We know
many
tones
the mass
absolutely innumerable.
In
all
made use
employed.
is
called the
TONE SYSTEM.
This tone-system contains above one hundred tones.
It
difficulty to fix
a particular
name
for each of
them
and
this
under seven
DEGREES.
These degrees have been named
CDE FG AB.
And
all tones
them.
CHAPTEE
II.
we make use
of a series of
characters, called
NOTES.
It
Mu-
eical Notation.
We
modifications,
by open or
filled circles,
or ovals, ac-
Where
called
LEGER LINES
are introduced, which, not being continuous, are easily distinguished from the lines of the stave.
Here
2.
^=1=1=4
4 j 4
w have introduced
20
those high or low tones, which are above the highest or the
We
words,
all
notes, if
we
only
knew
In other
we must
to
fix
sponding
For
this
CtEF s,
which indicate the tone represented by them.
there are three in use
:
Of such clefs
G-clef, or Treble-clef
C-clef,
and
F-clef, or Bass-clef.
THE
G-CLEF
fc
line inclosed
by
its
lower circle,
/f
of a
making
as the representais
At
invariably
placed upon the second line of the stave, and the notes pre-
ceded by
it
il
s^s
gab
21
By means
many
of additional leger-lines,
we migtt
designate
additional tones
upon
this stave
8-
it,
and the
is
succeeding
it,
marked
written-
to be played or
it is
The
sary,
More of
this,
however,
anon.
THE C-CLEF,
is
Its
this
and
its
use
is
three-
fold one.
'(jj^)
:,
it is
used
A,
as Soprano-clef;
upon the
first line
it
the
'
* A
DEFGAB CDEFGABC
B, as Alto- clef.
As such
it is
are called
,jmm.
3
V
-iD
z E
^ =
CDEFGAB CDE
^^B
22
C, as Tenor-clef.
As
sueli it IS
are called
6."
1^
A
It is
m
B
^-f?
m DEFGAB CDEFGAB
-well as in the
.
^
:
.^wi-it^
G or i^-clef.
3
It
T HE
F-CLEF.
f$
It is
now placed
exclusively
names
23
8.
3:
The above
appear 6hus
CHAPTEE m.
ABBBETEATIONS AOT) OTHER ACCrDEIITAL CHAEACTEES rw MUSIC.
We
ter is
The same
charac-
used for the transposition of a passage into a lower ocIn such case the wave-line
is
tave.
to be transposed.
cient.
8 will be
suffi-
alV-ottva, or aZZ'S^*, which, if placed above the notes, indicates that the higher octave is to be added to the notes
thus marked
intended.
if
Thus
12.
-$
m
this
all'Sya.
,
:c
::
$
manner :
all'Sva.
might be expressed in
13.
fcti:
25
Other abbreviations,
like alia
3za
(ter^), alia
6S
{sista),
quater,
ter,
:
it.
X4.^
26
If a passage
is
to be repeated, the
1= (prima
volta), are
placed above
it.
marked
him.
and seconda
volta,
stand here for 1st and 2d, time, and thus explain the mystery.
The words Da
similar meaning,
capo, (D.
i. e.,
C,
or
B. c,
or d.
c.,)
have a
"
to repeat."
is
Fine, (end,)
and
a pause
is
take place.
If the repetition is to begin at a certain point in the
dle of the piece, that point is
mid-
marked thus
and instead of
sign, are used.
d.
c, the words
from the
27
still
we might
say,
cessary for our immediate purpose, vre shall give their meaning -ffhen they occur.
CHAPTER
IV.
When we
find that
all
We have
Piano-forte.
We
have permitted
this
temporary incom-
Our
rotation, are
other.
Beginning from
for instance,
we
d;
room
The same
a and
b.
relation exists
g and a,
will
aid us materially in
We have here
accidentally mentioned
series
from c to
normal tone-series for our anathe above, the only one of the
is
com-
Here, then,
is
marked by a mere
29
the simple reason that, at present,
of designating them
Cdefgab
We
is
perfectly
it
were,
from one
c to the other,
we
der, or to use
word
for
" Ladder,"
we
will call it
.
A SCALE
it is
but natural
we should
call the
intermediate tones
DEGREES,
and the distances from tone to
gree,
tone, or
STEPS
When we now
compare the
different steps,
we
find that
tone.
We
by the terms " whole steps," or " steps," and " half steps."
We find, further,
first to
fourth to the fifth, from the fifth to the sixth, and from the
sixth to the seventh degree, are steps
to the fourth,
;
16, c
e-fga
1
h-c.
30
We
basis of a scale,
We will
remember
And now we
We
g-,
may
accidental
apparent to him.
The regular
succession
is
attended to
to g, thus
:
ga,
,17.
6, c, d,
e,/,
or thus,
i
but on striking these notes on the Piano, and comparing them
with our last diagram (No. 16), we soon discover that the
steps
The
and
the/
is
not what
we want.
Yet the
no name.
g-.
There
is
we need
The/ degree
original/",
we place
it
this
and
in order to
distinguish
from the
we
place this
mark
#
before
it.
This character
is
called a
31
is
made more
acute, elevated
sharpened,
as
were.
scale of
The
G, with
this
following appearance
18.
i
It is
now a
the scale of
It is
C in
to
experiment upon.
The student
G was
new
make
the scale of
G.
Thus
the stu-
dent
may
we can
explain his doubts, or remove his indecito add, that in the course of his la-
We
have simply
we
indicated,
i.
e.,
always re-
fail in
com-
We
on g, the
tone above
c,
that
we are warranted by
it,
upon f, the
tone below
c.
with^
32
19.
rf;
J
r
f-r^
with our dia-
this tone-succession
G,
it
was
by
another,
now
demands a
modification.
We
re-
we must
we have
it,
and in order
to dis-
h,
we
place a
b
before
it.
This character
is
called a
"
flat,"
and conveys
it
it
were.
With
pearance
it
the scale of
F would
m
The elevated tones have
them, as h
flat,
20.
*=
the word
g
" sharp"
afiSxed to
them,
the
name "flat"
affixed
to
&c.
tone to construct our scales upon,
Taking
fifth
above
fifth
G,D,^,E,B,Fi,
below
fifth,
Cit,&c.
Taking
fifth
C,F,Bi>,E\>,Jl\>,Di,
Gk
33
Enough
that
we know when
and enough to
in
two
differ-
ai.
il
FfaT.
iFLaTi
FILOTini3
.l.fHfiilSI'.i
flats
of a scale or key.
This signature
is
valid until
shall
it is
recalled
by
we
speak directly,) or
of music,
flats its
we have then
to
fied.
34
The
and
and sharps.
arise
and
is
piece
In such case
good imtil
it is
recalled
i. e,',
The
form
H
occurs.
There are
also instances in
is
or depression of a tone
point of pitch.
{hh,)
The former
elevates
it
in
a double na-
is
a scale.
Here
lines, called
* The word measure signifies a musical division marked by perpendicular " bars." More of thi in the chapter on Rhythm.
35
22.
^^^^^^^^p^^m
is
its
intermediate tones.
We have
A better
scale, in
reason for
it,
A
is
called a
Chromatic Scale.
In contradistinction to
it
is
called the
Diatonic Scale.
Tones which
c
l"
differ in
in sound, like 6
and
ct
and d
b ,
cI
Enharmomc,
More
cf this hereafter.
CHAPTBE
Since Music
V.
a combination of tones,
it is
necessary to
know
We
can designate
is
it
superficially,
one tone
or a
is
But
since under
and
we
next above
it
Frequently
and since
we
will give
The first degree, or First, or Prima. " Second, or Secunda. The second " Third, The third, or Tertia. " Fourth, or Qunrta. The fourth, " Fifth, The fifth, or Quinta. " Sixth, The sixth, or Sexta. " Seventh, op Septima. The seventh,
And
in
some .instances
it is
Thus we have
37
degree, or Octave,
or Octava. or
degree, degree,
degree,
Nona.
The
eleventh
degree,
degree,
" Thirteenth, or
Decima
tertia.
degree,
We perceive
nothing but the
higher octave.
that there
is
When we now
spective pitch,
we place them
called
This relation
is
INTERVAL.
We
say, therefore,
a second,
and
But even
know
Which
mand,
of those five
is
now
in reality intended ?
If
we deg'i
,
may be g,ov
fifth
or
^X,
or ^1"
or g^^.
They
all
degree
we take
HALF-STEP,
and the
STEP.
We
are
now enabled
to give
tone-relations of
any possible
interval,
by merely counting
38
c
two half-steps,
third c
cS
and
c4
d,
or c
c
d and
b
(i b
d"
The
d and d
dit
e,
or four half-steps, c
cS
cI
d,
rf
it
and
it
e.
But
measure of the
Each
interval can be
Major, or
Minor, or
Diminished, or
Superfluous.
Each minor
interval arises
it is
same major
interval.
Each diminished
minor
interval, or
jor interval.
Each superfluous
major interval.
When we
how
of
make
And
major intervals
is
Consequently
39
c c
d
e
is
a major second,
"
a major
third,
cf c g
c c c
a major seTenth,
" d "
an
octave,
a major ninth;*
that
contains 1 step,
third
fourth,
fifth,
sixth,
seventh,
octave,
ninth,
steps,
steps,
2 4
and
1 half-step,
3 steps,
steps,
5 stops,
steps,
it will
be easy
to
make
of
it
ing or subtracting as
many
If,
we wish
to change
into
change the
intervals
c
to
g^
Cg^
is
a minor
The minor
from
c are therefore
d
e
b,
i, b,
b, b, b,
cf cg ca
c
(c)
.
third,
fourth,
fifth,
sixth,
seventh.
related
thus
df and eg are
fb
no*
a major
fourth, &c.
40
In order to change c
into
a superfluous
fifth,
the
must be elevated a
jor seventh c
I
half-step.
In order to
b i
make
of the
ma-
a minor seventh,
"
.
must be depressed
minor seventh
ct
It
is
a diminished se-
In this manner
it is
tones
we
find
now
intervals,
Enharmonic
Intervals.
c
e
^
is
enharmonic
di
S is
t ,
&c.
CHAPTER
THE TONE
VI.
SPECIES, SEXES,
OE MODES.
command seven
de-
Music has at
its
possible that
all
But
limits of
design and
tendency, since
sensations,
it
is
move.
This circumstance
facilitates the task of
intr^ucing the
The seven
every composition.
five
in
sibilities
of combination.
all
But of
modern Music
They
are
42
distinguished In both are the seven degrees, and they are to each other from each other by the relation of the degrees degree iorms -with and by the size of the interval which each
the
first tone.
we formed
and belong
to the major
mode.
Since
it will
we know how
to
be easy for us to
We
6
efga
e
t
c,
fg
fit
c.
Thus we
d fg a b
e
I"
c.
1"
The most
is
>
Like
other super-
us disagreeably.
,aa. -S^
^^^^
43
This, however,
is
23.
>
>!.
V.
!fe
n
and
it is
not
CHAPTEE Vn.
THE KEYS.
In the fourth chapter we have been taught the number of the
major
scales or keys,
We can
major
what signature
to give to each
scale or key.
different law.
it,
The
Their signature
but each minor key has the signature of that major key
lies
which
it.
The
signature of .^-minor
is
npt, as one
would expect,
ct
and h
l"
and
Here
D, G,
C,
y,
Bb,
Eb.
Two
The
we have
seen, lies a
We
nature.
sig-
1,
to be depressed or
elevated
2, it serves us as the
But we know
;
and
written,
we
must turn
point,
to its
harmony.
But
until
we
arrive
at that
we
will
of a picCe,
of that chord,
the key.
If,
two
we
is
composed
in B-minor,
not suitable 1
The
or
i"
belonging to them
is
CHAPTER Vni.
RELATION OP KEYS.
When
degree.
we compare the
different
tonej/and/S
in four
C-major has
_/",
c,
g, d j J5J-major
gi, di
Two
be
RELATED.
We
number of
common.
There
are, conse-
DEGREES OF RELATIONSHIP.
Finally,
tion
we have
between
different
keys
in the
There
47
1.
Relation of
Major Keys.
The keys
deviate from each other in but one tone, and stand in the
f,rst
When we
spread
Q^^DhA\,E\>B\,FCGD-~AE-'BF!i
we
find that each
310133466
key has
its
and
to the left.
two tones.
side,
and
!>
-major on the
of Parallel Keys.
The
Thus
C-major and
./2-minor,
C-minor and
When we
we
combine
this
perceive a
new kind
degree
major keys
2,
with
Parallel
key,
^for
instance,
and
The
43
0-major,
Ji'-major,
first
degree.
l)-ininor,
We might pursue
ther, but this Tvould
much
far-
paper.
3.
Relationship of
their
Major Keys,
We know
grees from
its
Consequently
we should
consider
them as
The
Tonic, (the
first tone,)
and
this
communism
of tones
is
so influential, (as
we
shall see at
we can
same
first
degree.
And
finally
we consider
Thus we
consider
to
:
Defgabh4def
ah
c
a g efgl a d
h
c
efig
a~-bcdie
When we
49
F-major,
It
Gr-inajor.
FIRST BOOK.
ELEMENTS OF MUSICAL COMPOSITION.
First Part.
Composition for Single Farts, {Monophonic Composition).
CHAPTER
I.
ITS SPECIES.
of one or
more
successions of
for
the
we
distinction.
Por a
contain merely sounds, which succeed each other, but that sue
is
regulated
hy
certain laws
to continue.
all
But regardless of
rhythmical laws,
we
the present,
They
can progress from low to high, from high to low, or these two
be mixed. We distinguish therefore ascending (a), and descending (b), tone-chains, and those, which both ascend and The repetidescend, and which we will designate as vague (c). tion of one and the same tone, too, might inappropriately be
called a tone-chain (n)
;
and
other
by
or
by irregular degrees
C
as in B.
^^
-#-
54
It is
effect
to repose.
distinctly,
Vague tone-chains awalce neither the one nor the other sensation but with a certain indecision remain between the two
either.
Yet with
all their
deviation in detail
-^J^
i
We have now only to
is
^=='^iir'ir7Z i 3c:
more
restless,
unsteady,
Tone Eegulation.
The vast resources which music has
tone-chains,
at its
command make
it
we should observe a certain order and limit, in ordei way amidst the enormous mass of tone-formations. We require foundation upon which we can construct our forma tions, and from which we can derive them.
to find our
s,
We will
them the
But
we
The Major
Scale.
become
ap-
parent of themselves.
scale,
from
its
Tonic to
its
octave, rests
upon the
i
Tonic,
this is
-gs:
=i==
moves thence through the remaining degrees {d to b), and upon the Tonic, or its octave. Al] perfectly agreeable to our feelings, and the more so -when
it
we compare
to other tone-chains
for instance,
with
55
i
the Tonic).
ir^r
m
the scale.
.0.
We recognize
The
it.
moment of repose, the scale the moment of motion, Here we have discovered at is formed. last an antithesis which runs through the whole science of musi& Repose and Motion, Tonic and Scale.
In juxtar-position to the Tonic
the
When we
that
it
examine the
scale in its
smgle progressions
it
we
find
consists of
two
i.
e.
and one
half-step.
G
one
;
B
one
E F
half
G
one
A
one
B
half
C*
* We suppose that every student of composition is familiar with tin major scales but in case of the student's not being able to represent to himself such a scale at once, we refer him to the above measurement of th
scale for assistance.
We know that on
scale,
every tone of our tone-system we can construct a major they all progress like scales have like proportions
;
-J
step,
1 step,
1 step,
1 stp,
-J
step.
In order then to construct a major Scale on any particular tone, we have but to write the seven degrees from it to the octave, and justify it afterwards, by means of flats or sharps, according to the above diagi-am. In constructing the scale on a, for instance, we first write the seven degrees
to b, a whole step, agrees with the diagram ought to be a whole step, and consequently will have to be enlarged by changing c into cj| c^io d is now a half-step, dto e a whole step both in accordance with our model eiof, however, is merely a half-step when consequently /has to be changed into/|, and, it ought to be a whole one for the same reason, g into g^.
step.
ABGDEFGA A
: ;
we would
first
Dh
E F G A B
G Dh
to the other
and then regulate the distances from one degree sharps or flats, whichever is wanted.
by means
of
56
tone-chains originates in
c,
G
Even
O
_^
C
in this formation of the scale
B
we
JS
F
Tonic the
chief
find the
point from which the other tones advance, to which they return,
we have
tacitly
happen
particularly, in a
and the
latter
We will theresuc-
the scale
in
crotchets (quarter-notes)
i?
But
this
form does
not
satisfy
us,
be to
us.
Our
and to regulate ; we must divide this chain to make Admitting the division by two as the conception.
easier of
easiest,
we
ry
this
r^
manner
f\
and
regulation
of time.
Simple
on paper ; but to make it reality we distinguish every first note of a measure (marked '^) by a stronger accentuation. This accent
perceptible,
and by these
57
Our
and
tone-chain appears
now
in short, it has
been made
it
A
the
is called a Melody, and a melody is and simplest creation of art. Already in our first attempt we found it necessary to begin
Rhythmical Tone-Chain
first
tone,
and
its
com-
and But now we have learned also to distiuguish rhythmically important and unimportant tones. If our melodies shall now be round and perfect, rhythmically as well as tonically,
in fact
this beginning
was
owing to
ending thus.
we
We
ends on an unim-
portant one
is lost,
as
it
But perhaps we prefer not being tied to this particular form of beginning it may be possible to have a beginning and ending
;
alike satisfactory.
And
here
is
the time to
all
remember a
our labors.
its
accompany us through
sible,
"
Whenever a formation
appears to us imperfect in
necessary
of it whatever
it
or
^let it
be found wherever
wanting."
may
and
afterwards try
to supply
what
is
In this instance
we know,
that
it is
ginning and ending of our melody on an accented part of the also know, that the eight notes of our scale have measure.
We
58
to appear in four measures
at least
we know
at present
of no
other form.
part
it
must be
note, succeeded
This noted
figure
fol-
lowing:
m
It is
The
three
wanting notes have to enter the vacant measure. The first of these can do so in the form of a quarter note; the other two have
to
iw
We have now arrived
all
s
at a formation
our demands.
1.
and ending on
the Tonic.
2. It is
3. In
and well closed off, and thus satisfactory. same time we have obtained But at the three species of notes half-notes, 4. A variety of rhythm and this variety proves quarter-notes, and eighth-notes
distinct
itself at the
5.
same
titne-,
A means of promoting
eighth-notes,
our object:
for,
serve to accelerate
movement towards it, and to make the end-note more characteristic. We have now a gradation of rhythm
the
as well as of melody.
Thus
one:
far
ascending.
we have inadvertently represented all our tone-chains as Nothing prevents us now from attempting a descending
6.
s
-&-
59
It
character.
elevation
the other
is
exclusively relaxation.
m
m
^ m
mm
rhythm to the Tonic of a higher octave, marks this point by a rhythmical pause, and then returns in We perthe same steady manner to the repose of the first tone. ceive also that this formation is composed of two halves (a and b) which, each by itself perfect, combine to make the perfect whole, a whole consisting of two subordinate wholes. But though each
of these parts or phrases resembles the other in rhythmical formation and tone-contents, the direction in the tone succession of
each is exactly opposite ; the one forming the reversed counterpart of the other.
thesis
and
8.
We
1.
realized
have now conceived the first ideas of composition, and them in tones. They were
tone-chain,
with
its different
directions
and progresdiatonic
sions.
first
foundation of
all
tone succession
the
scale.
between repose and motion in the scale. and simplest rhythmical order, by the aid of which a mere tone-chain became a melody.
distinction
first
60
5.
The
fixed
division,
6.
and accent.
marked point
The invented phrase (thesis) demanded a counterpart (antithesis), and the two together formed a Period.
9.
formation of a
new
nature
the
passage
^was indi-
cated.
And
thus
we have
Phrase
Period^Passage
61
CHAPTER
II.
ITS EFFICACr.
In order to arrive at
new
progressions
we wiU
see
it
return
now
;
to
our
first
We
constructed of
in
measures a
series of quarter-notes
the latter quarter and eighth-notes, which lead to the final note.
Thus we can
for instance,
a tone-
chain of quarter-notes.
'i w
A group ending more satisfactorily is in the latter measures.
10. .
^
we
can select
If
still
we
more groups.
"^w
phrases are called designs.
g
Every composition
consists of such de-
Such forms which contain the germ and the impulse of longer Each junction of two or more notes
and
it is for
us to consider
how we
how
to apply them,
continually at
new
of these designs
scale has given
us
number.
fi2
1.
By
repetition on the
12.
^^^a
same
degrees,
2.
By
i
3.
p^
i
5
Augmented.
DiminiBhcd.
By
4.
By
13.
^j-jS
By
changing of i^esis (weak, unaccented part of a measure)
5.
f
6.
P^3
i. e.,
or contracting the design ; a smaller for a larger interval, or vice versa. '%-
By expanding
by changing
-&-
".^^^^^
7.
By combining one
more to a phrase
iw
We need not mention
1^
that these different manners of applica^
We
signs,
how
formation
We
it
need therefore only show a few of these deto the industry of the student to invent others.
and leave
63 But to
return again to our actual
task,
we
will begin
this
the passages.
2,
FOKMATION OF PASSAGES.
passage.
Each
Thus the
No.
#-l<U-
ffi
The same design reversed would give us the following
16.
$
our object to
(thesis).
i
make No. 15
e
still
g
more
light
Were it
we
measure
and
flighty,
could do so
17.
i^g^s^
new ending and
beginning,
we
18.
1^
design,
a3
i
en-
A combination of designs
tirely
new
19.
u
The advantage of
m
now
aspect or feature
The
facility
new
^not
confusedly, according
64
to his humor, design, and inclination
^but retaining
new without
absolute necessity.
\
^FOKMATION OF PHRASES.
Here, too,
only in
the third design in No. 11, because of most conspicuous. In No. 5 it appeared the third measure. But it might appear as well in any
it is
we begin with
the
other measure.
20.
^
a
W^
fill
this
This leads
different species
of
22.
E
it
s
new
to consider.
The
rhyth-
two different parts which are alike different from the phrases and from the halves of a period thesis and antithesis. But while their rhythmical formation is
satisfactory, their tonical formation is not;
for either
call
they do
We will
these form-
23.
JJ
-m-
b,
^
but the sections
a, 6,
and
d, also.
65
Let us
now
24.
^^
it,
^
^
-s>-
25 ^-
^^
we have
and
In the one
we
A
26.
^P^g^
here, at a,
27.
i D
-#-
5
filled four
But
here, in
measures with-
We
we
take four
continue, perhaps in
manner:
28.
^S^^^^g^^
We need not defend the slight variation in
A
strict
p
29.
-^
1-
and
this
would lead us
to
this
^i^^ss^^
30.
at a greater liberty
of
foi-mation.
The
we have now abandoned the division by 2, we might tempt slow phrases of three equal sections or divisions.
31.
^
;
at-
:zz
t 3
to
common law
is
two or more measures. We shall give more instances for with the same right with which we have introduced the figure 3 here, we shall introduce other deviations from the
in future
primitive proportions.
4.
PERIODS.
both parts were perfectly corresponding with each other, only that the tone-chains were conducted into opposite directions. This is
but No. 30 teaches us to give to the antimore animated, different formation. Thus we might form No. 23 into a period by enlarging it thus
;
^
32.
It will
the
thesis
be advisable to observe at first, in these important parts and antithesis equality in the number of measures,
and to accustom the mind to order and symmetry, before attempting other,
more
free formations.
67
CHAPTER
DISCOVERY OF
III.
NEW
MEANS.
We have now
discovered
all
the Design,
the Section,
the Phrase,
the Passage, the Period^with thesis and antithesis.
contents.
It consists
of three notes
one
quarter note
and
case
measure.
But the three notes might also have equal value, and in that we would be led to a new design which would give us the
following phrase,
33.
Ep=lEj
it
Time."
this
and with
The
difference
between
first
is,
that in the
The
this
and by
34.
^m^first
:?2=
^-
ing together.
first note was as long as the two fallowHere it is of twice the length. To give it thrice the length would lead us from Triple time to Common time, or
In our
design the
from 4. to X-
35.
fe^a^^^
e,8
We might have
into one.
time, if
we had
we
ABA BAB
what was once a chief
part,
little as
E
closing with
built.
But,
pear,
1.
it
36 and
Na
7 may
ap-
reveals to us
what
in fiiture wjll
be very important.
in
We perceivfe
that No.
No.
7,
same rhythm of
Those
less ac-
marked
cent
notes.
all
the remaining
a
4-4
A
a
if
phrase into
one,
one into a
fall
2 a
one.
Even
upon a former
marked.
chief part, as in
No.
will
still
be
sufficiently
2.
We
35, a
by en
37.
i^ 3^^^
will
Sk
become
that
particularly important
dot-
in
It is clear
ted notes
many more
38.
When we now
perceive that the
^m m
-&
return to No. 34, and analyze the design,
we
first
note contains, or
is
equal
to,
two
;
quarters,
69
i^i
39.
3;
il
^ir^-^
two
SiiEt
still
m^
and reduce
eacih
or
we might
further,
quarter-note into
-pg^#j.^^;E^
Here we
arrive at a class of
=p=f=
new
41.
Such designs
are, of course, of
we
we
same
we
one
:J_/-#
-a^*-al-
Qm
1^
Because
zpi
^^m^^^^H
taken a\ intead of a ?
~^-
Why have we
in all the
former
measures the interval from the third to the fourth note was
only a half-step, and because this smaller interval of a half-step
leads
first time, have we introduced a foreign tone, and we have perceived at the same time that with the aid of such a one we can ascend more flowingly than with the whole step. We can now introduce the neighboring tone much sooner, and
still
later
^S
We have to jepeat
is
m^ m.
--
no room
might appear
70
monotonous and trifling to us.
second assistant note
We can avoid
it
by
45.
'^m^'^^^m^^
we were
inclined to
If
make
it
more
con-
spicuous,
we might change
into
2: time.
46.
In the
tion.
^^
=K-
^^^^m
at a
new
conspicuous forma
They are not as important as the sections, but nevertheless of some consequence. We will call them Links. Such links might have been obtained much sooner by the prolonging of
notes.
And
thus a period
might be divided,
into
1,
into thesis
3,
and antithesis
(a, b.) 2,
the thesis
(c, d, e,
two
f, g, h,
and
Small
I.
may
will
it
be
still
71
student not to disdain or neglect these
first
attempts.
The
ad-
the student
-will
mode
of proceeding which
He
subject the
how important
Symphony
minor,
which grows almost entirely from a design of four notes, four notes which do not even distinctly indicate any particular key.
^^^^^
and yet these few notes have given
will claim the
rise to
a composition which
pensable acquirement of composing without the aid of any instruhere where the student can learn to represent to
by
more
or
less completeness.
At
a later point,
it is
impossible.
faults.
The
If
5,
recommended, and the other, the losing sight of his object. had produced No. 46 immediately after No. 31 or No.
should probably have obtained a good phraSe
ness of the
;
we we
how and
wherefore,
The second
scale,
for
A-ix.
We finally
i^^^^^
advise the pupil not to confine his exercises to the
to attempt
them
in every
major key
and
if
72
Second Part.
Composition for
Two
CHAPTEE
I.
tone-chains, the
more
and
octave.
No. 5 treated in
this
ing:
49.
^P^
in different tone-regions.
is duophonic, it employs The consequence of this is a
It is
two voices
larger,
effects.
particularly appropriate
for
massive
But two such voices are mentally equal to one only ; for, thougL both have the same rhythm and
tone-succession.
Yet
one.
this
many monophonic
:
phrases.
We
50.
We
^m
73
because the transition from the sixteenth notes to quarter notes
violent.
When we now
melody
(as
:
apply our
first
proceeding to this
new
basis for
i. e.,
we might
present ones),
we open
again a
new and
into
in-
Without entering
we
will
it
different regions
might be treated
designs.
same manner, and give rise to many new such phrases would partake of such vagueness of
special practising.
But
character that
any
Finally,
we might
52
^ J
P^^^^fc
^
much
at present.
tral
Such apparent polyphony will be particularly useful in orchescomposition and in the accompaniment of vocal music, but
74
CHAPTER
II.
1.
MANNER OF ARRIVINO AT
or
little
IT.
HowEVKE much
signs,
we
first
It is
certainly not d.
But the following, e, answers our purpose. To these, again, we can only add g, and after that none will answer but the octave c.
WWhat we
by the
have here accidentally discovered
is
fully confirmed
science of acoustics.
The
54.
The Tonic is the basis, fandamental tone, of the whole mass. The ear acknowledges in this combination the most perfect conWe will call such tone-mass " Harmony," or " Harmonic cord. mass," and its lowest tone we wUl call the fundamental tone. The above combination is therefore our first harmonic mass.
Following the sounds which acoustics designate as the next
succeeding,
we meet with
75
scale
;
we
shall
speak of
it
in future
and immediately
aftei- it,
makes
its
appearance.
55.
P
;
Of these,
er,
and g belong to the first mass do not agree with its fundamental tone.
c, e,
first
tone at least of it
J^
56.
^
I
Our
of our investigations
will
be proved
in another
way.
"we find
:
When we now
111
57.
BE
3=
-&-
i w^
1111 ^ t3H
1.
are wanting
for
the six preceding notes have neither the form nor connection of the scale.
2.
That nine notes (those marked 1) belong to the first harmonic mass, but passing all repetitions, the latter consists
only of the notes
c, e,
and g ; the same which our ear has These notes are placed very reg-
*aoh
The Tonic
is
Five other notes (marked 2) form the second harmonic mass, which is not alone inferior in number of sounds con-
formed less regularly. The funmass is the thrice-repeated g ; n tone which we have discovered in our first mass. Addstituting
it,
but
is
also
damental note of
this
we
discov-
move
we know
already that
76
We have long designated the fundamental tone of the first mass by the word Tonic. We will now distinguish the fundamental tone of the second mass by the word Dominant. The why of calling this tone the Dominant will be shown at some For the present it deserves that name, if for nothing future time.
else, at least for
it is
and
is
two masses.
the
fifth
note of every
scale, or
Tonic
Formerly we placed
Tonic and Scale
of the
latter,
and was the beginning and end of the scale. Here we find the Tonic again in the same capacity ; but this time it is supported not only by octaves, but by the whole first mass, which latter we shall therefore call " tonical mass," or " tonical harmony."
which
mass we find, now, the second mass, And this first, whence it originated. The fundamental note of is done in the most simple manner. the second mass goes to that of the first (the tonic) ; if an ocOpposed to
this tonical
is
existing
it
remains as the
fifth
of the to
mass /proceeds into the nearest tone of the first mass, e, and d can do nothing better than to follow this direction, and,
consequently, goes to
c.
58.
-^-^i=t^
mT
rt r
first
first becomes most prominent when the tone /is in existence. It is less prominent when the two others only, g, d, are used. For these two form a fifth exactly like one in the first mass (c g), and
the
can partake, as
it
The same/
as
we have
has given us (No. 57), and in which the interval of the seventh
(^
/)
is
not contained.
n
2.
APPLICATION.
We can apply
1.
Melodically, for
new
tone-ohains.*
2.
we can base
Melodic Application.
It is
still
imperfect scale,
c,
rf,
e,f, g,
which can
we
of
all
59
m
It is
^
rplain that the
first
^=
mass, on account of
tones, is
its
regular con-
number of
much more
productive and
But
melody of
either
mass
e.,
them
mass
60.
Ml
^^
is
we find that repetition of tone or design and the development of Rhythm will be necessary to produce variety of invention froir
such insufficient means.
we must
tine
foundation for melody was the MajorScale ; here we have dissecond foundation, the harmony, or the harmonic masses.
78
ment ;
for,
more
much
tone-chain
i.
by a
e.,
But
will
since in either
mass we
excep-
we
accompaniment
tions
whenever necessary.
Duophony.
M:
61.
^
Below
is
make
f?*
i-j-
ei
In the
r
first
~i^
eight
of first and second mass, and after this they belong exclusively to
the
first
mass
at
though the y
second mass.
Why
e ?
Firstly, because
it
g had but
e
just
of
voice
secondly, because
mass much more distinctly than the g, which belongs to both masses. The repetition does take place in the very next moment, but then it happens at places where the first mass, under any circumstances, remains stationary, and where it can be done without injuring that change of masses which we had in view. Why have we commenced our accompaniment only with the
eighth tone
?
we
it,
which is undoubted, and from this certainty was easy afterwards, (from a to the end) to regulate whatever was uncertain.
3.
HARMONIC DESIGNS.
distinctly
We recognize now
more
what we can
ofTert
i'h (uir
79
present material.
Until
now we have
viz., tonical
viz.,
only
known two
classesi
and rhythmical
designs.
We can add
can produce
(a) (b) (c)
now
a third class,
from the
first
mass
exclusively.
use, or
62.
-rrr
4.
THE CADENCE.
that the
first
Moment
and
of Repose.
is
most
effective in the
We
shall
effect
63.
^
r
rb.
^
--^
T
lead
unless
we
resign the
harmony and
Tonic, as at
We have,
the
first
;
mass
exactly as
;
we
taposition
effect
moved
an ending (cadence), thus will the second mass move now The into the first (c), in order to accomplish the same object. third tone only is thereby inadmissible, because (d) it would prevent the resolving of the upper voice into the Tonic, in order to
end there.
5.
we
appropriate to
therefore,
are,
the
Tonic
but
no we
80
have a second one, however imperfect,
ply in the ending of the thesis,
This latter
we
will ap-
64.
^ ir
a Half-cadence, while the
g
cadence,
first will be appropriately Full Cadence, or simply " Cadence."
and
call it
designated
by Whole
81
CHAPTER
Now,
ject to
III.
we
It is
our ob-
at present
known
to us
form of a Period.
us regulate our two masses into a Period.
First of
all, let
65.
d -&
-f-
^
-=F
The beginning with the first mass lies probably nearest. The thesis (a) makes its cadence from the firsj into the second mass. The antithesis (b) makes its cadence from the second mass into the first. The vacant space can be filled out according to the general laws of Tone-succession, Progression, Harmony,
and Phraseology which we have learned. And here begins again the practice, and with
the student.
it
the industry of
We might
66.
fill
it
began,
m if=x^y-x^x=^f-r
r
Therefore
we
will
retain for the present the first mass, but not the -same notes
67.
E^
S
r-r
1
^
first
;
r-i
This attempt
acter of the
is
is
very monotonous.
We
82
a
more decided
direction, as
we have been
taught in our
first
we
should
--;
83
No.
68,
and
is
repeated
in.
We perceive, also
fifth, b,
how
repeated in the
Were we in possession
of the tone
the
melody of the seventh measure would probably be, d, c, b. The further development and practice is left to the student, but he will perceive more and more distinctly, that with our present poverty of tones, a careful employment of rhythm and a clear distribution of it, will lead him to an animated and effective arrangement of the whole. Thus No. 68 led to the last phrase,
which, again, might lead to the following
Andante.
:
71.
^^Sfy^i^^gfef
We
falls into
two
sections,
of
which the
merely
touches the second mass, and thus melodically and rhythmically forms an imperfect cadence, because the end note does not fall
upon a rhythmical chief-part. The same cadence appears end of the phrase ; but this time it is perfect.
at the
84
CHAPTEE
COMPOSITIONS OF
IV.
PAETS.*
When we now
tions, the
consider
how
by means of mass on a rhythmical chief-part, and how much more satisfactory a whole it forms, it leads us to form from
thesis
Jf'irst
which parts for the present, are distinguished from, a single Period, merely by the even more distant separation, and by the fact that
each strives to be considered as a different whole.
TWO-PART FORM.
of composition, as
we
find
it
in
many Marches,
phrases of a greater
number
Each part
strives to
be an independent whole
each ought to
eight
measures.
These are the regular dimensions, but we know already that they can be larger or smaller.
If the first part
is
it
But
merely
must
let
It
ends, therefore,
We draw the attention of the student to a diatinction which we have here, and the lack of which, in other theoretical works, has been the source of ranch confusion. We refer to the use of the word " part." If using it in relation to number of voices, we speak of compositions /or one, two, or more parts. If using it in relation to Rhythm, or form in general, we speak of compositions of one, two, or more parts. As we advance further we shall employ the words monophonio, duophonic, triphonic, tetraphonie, pentaphonie, &o., &a., to designate compositions for one, two, three, four, five, &c., (fee, parts, and endeavor to ccnfine the word "part" exclusively to Ehythm and form.
*
made
85
as formerly the thesis, with a half-oadence.
Were we now
to
end the thesis of the first part in the same manner, the same ending would appear twice in succession consequently, the half;
its strength,
The
by
mass.
it is
full
make
it less
important,
either
by
trans-
into
by an
second
mass
72.
^^m^^^
now become
a perfectly-closed phrase, the
full
first.
(c)
second part has the same right, only that the latter makes a
If
we
in-
we
can do
by means of a
half-oadence,
But
first
The plan
-9-^
were,
become? then our objeot to multiply our tonical meaus, aS it by means of rhythmical tone-repetitions, tone-figuration, &c., &c. The following
It
fl:
mj3
m
phrase
^_p=^fl
iW
Only
?^
may
serve as example of a
first
made
use of tone-repetition.
Ehythm makes
seen that the
It is easily
melody, from g up to c, e, only a decided and distinct grouping which can make
We
and
B,
c and d, and e,
this
and
g.
Judging
form of a periodically-constructed
as antithesis.
we would have
f,
to
and a
would have double the But its two halves with their subdivisions are so well separated, and so regular, that exactly in consequence of this, no misproportion is experienced in the unequal
length of the antithesis.
manner we might prolong the of equal sections, or, by giving it an Appendix (Coda), . e., repeating the last section. The following little phrase in which, by the bye, we have not observed
length of the two parts.
antithesis,
In like
by
either
composing
it
of a gentle relaxation
may sowp
made
use
as example.
87
75.
m m pii^S^S^
thesis closes at
^m^^^^mw-.
The
The whole
this,
its
ought/
Instead of
the voices
rest,
proper
and with the ninth measure begins a repetition of the whole antithesis.
The
final link,
76.
S
finally,
more
repetitions
To
favor such
Codas,
it
is
advisable to
make
;
the preceding
cadence imperfect,
either
by means of
tone-position, or
by
vari-
made
tions.
We have also introduced a kind of " leader" to the Coda. Such Coda, however, premising the good proportions of all
end of the
antithesis, or secthesis.
ond
part,
but
it
Retrospection.
At
we have rep:
tone-formations
Beginning,
Progress,
End,
Eepose,
Eepose,
Motion,
by
Tonic,
Scale,
Tonic.
88
ideas.
Our monophonic phrases corresponded perfectly The form of the Period oheyed the same laws.
Periods,
tie
'vrith
these
But when
we
see that
was
sufficient in itself,
scale,
With
cadences
the aid of the two harmonic masses and the two different
we have
The fiindamental
forms
Eepose,
Tonic,
Motion,
Scale,
in the
Repose,
Tonic,
:
harmonic Period
Motion,
t.
Reposei
\
Repose,
Tonic,
Motion,
Repose,
Motion,
Scale,
Repose,
Tonic.
Tonic Scale,
Motion,
Topic 8va.
Half-cadence,
Tonic Mass,
Repose,
Motion,
This more perfect periodical construction led us to the twopart form, which again corresponds with the
fundamental features
we
represent
its
external construction of
and antithesis
First Part.
Second Part.
8 measures.
Thesis,
Antithesis.
8 measures.
Thegis,
Antithesis.
4 measures.
4 measures.
4 measures.
4 measures.
we
and ends regularly in the same mass. It is the beginning of the whole tone-development therefore the place where the design
;
of the Period, or
its designs,
are settled
the
moment which we
The
first antithesis,
part, together
the
first
89
foil
ca
follow
We have permitted
still
by
codas,
The
shows
last
part
by means
We
three
Repose,
First Part.
90
CHAPTEK
V.
We
tition
due
we have
different cadences,
when with
oflener.
We experienced this
stni
repetition.
be too much
means
As soon
as
we add new
Such acquisition
nothing but
the increase
we have
used until
now
But
agree so
in order to
we will
i
77.
^^^
.d.
e
What
volume of
^m
J.
it 1
f^
new
do we gain by
First of
all,
move
this,
we h^ve
91
for the
in equal intervals
and direction
but
this leads us to
1,
opposite directions,
2, different intervals
of the volce-oouples.
move in
opposite directions.
78.
^8
u tmm
frf ^?
Contrary/ Motion.^'
-
This and the former application of the double duophonio manner are the most natural, because they are based upon the gen-
most natural form of accompaniment (No. 61) of the duoIn sincfle instances, however, the two voicecouples might combine together in arbitrary intervals.
phonio composition.
79.
P
ei=F
we have
1=r
m
*
^
Since
first, two voices might sustain this mutual tone in various manners, while the others might move in
We will call
ment of the
such tones, which continue throughout the moveother voices, " Sustaining tones" for they give to the
whole tone-movement a material and bodily connection. But since all our tones and masses originate in the Tonic, we
can bodily realize
this intellectual unity
92
voices through the
81.
These sustaining-tones can be animated by rhy thmization of various kinds, which either strengthens the
rhythm of other
voices,
it
other moves, or
Ld
8v'a
.
L=rrLd
.
ri
&|-^-^
\J
m mu
>
'Hi> ^^
When we
1.
2. 3.
4.
The doubled voices (No. 77). The contrary motion (No. 78). The arbitrarily-composed masses (No. 79), and, The sustaining^iotes (Nos. 80 and 81) the double duo-
we have our
mass, and
us.
gives us a
it
new juxtaposition
of greater and
lesser
with
tain
this
now
by the direction of tone-succession, and by the rhythm. In new juxtaposition we find, also, the means of more characteristically representing the more animated or light, and the more But firm or heavier character, than by mere rhythmical accent. even our former means of gradation find a new sphere in the ascending of our voice-couples.
83.
93
Tliese are the nearest formations of the double duophonio composition
;
they give
sufficient
They only
require a
at our
command, which we
We
have
now
is
twice two voices, but can get along with a single voice-couple,
out of which
we
But
it
advisable that
we employ
The former
requires that
we do
it
of the whole, as
struction.
we have
seen
The change,
No. 82,
rule
it
With
tion.
the following
Part begins a
series of analyzations
and
exercises which will exclude, for a time at least, all free forma-
mind
to
will
94
Third Part.
The Harmony of ike Major
Scale.
However diversified our tone-world has been thus far devei we can clearly see the insuificiency of everything discov ered. At first we had the complete diatonic scale, with the license, even, of admitting foreign tones, but we could only move in it monophonically. Afterwards we gained the harmonic massoped,
es,
voice-parts
and the possibility of combining simultaneously two or four but they were insuificient for the complete scale.
;
:
scale in the
polyphonous
We
resume
polyphonous composition,
CHAPTER
I.
OnR
scale.
first
object
is
now
Here we
first
we have
This
g),
which
called
or
more tones
to a
Harmony
is
The lowest tone in such chord (c) is called " Fundamental tone." It is the most important tone of the chord, because it serves as
basis for the
whole construction.
95
tlie
other tones of the chord are regulated and designated by (e) is called the " Third" and the next one
i.
it.
is
.,
No. 79 we have perceived that the tones of a, chord do not always appear in their original position. Tlie very fu-st
first the itself in No. 54 in the following manner fundamental note, then the Octave, then the Fifth, then again the
mass showed
Octave, and after that only came the Third, and again the Fifth.
same time we see that every note of the chord can be applied more than once either in different octaves (as in No. 54), or (as can easily be imagined) by different voices on the same place. Both proceedings are called ''Doubling" of the chord-
At
the
notes.
We
we
chord.
for
Which
we
shall
it is
the
it
Nature
itself has
used
After this
we
shall
The Third,
of our natural
most
ular concord,
84.
ir
intervals.
easily
We have already
means always
voluntarily resigned
by no
79 we have even
require, for the
96
present, no particular consideration.
We
;
will
now
place our
always retain
it is
its original
cause
But
since
our other tones at pleasure, the Octave, Third, or Fifth are placed
occasionally in the upper voice.
85.
r r
'-
-F
97
-f
98
and
its fifth.
The
third in each
is
fifth
in
each
is
a perfect
fifth,
.
Tlte chords
on /and
ff
one on
We
C ma-
can therefore find our chords /a-c, and g-b-d on the Tonic of i''and
G major,
jor.
it
were, in
We
G
and
major, or as
These keys
in the first
we
actually are
(C major)
degree of relationship*;
that the
of the same, and of the tonic chords of the two nearest related-
major
scales
scales.
:
Therefore
on the nearest
,
thus has
own
we have
as harmonies constructed
We must compre-
hend
it
clearly, therefore,
and retain
it.
* Nearest
stance:
related or related in the first degree, are stioh major keys as other. major and Cf major for in;
0,
d,
e,
f, g, a,
b, c.
a, b,
c,
d, e, /j), g.
differ
d,
e,
b, c. f, g, a,
f,g,a,
bh, c, d,
e,
f,
are distinguished merely by one b, consequently they are nearest related. Bb, P, O, <?, B, E, A, B, i^|, the nearIn the quint-circle, Gb, Ih, Ah, Of course, the more est-related keys are at each side of any particular one. two keys de-viate from each other, the less are they related.
M,
99
CHAPTER
II.
A.
The Four
Voices.
We
return
now
Foi-
merly we had directed our attention merely upon the chords which existed in it. We will now look at it from another point
of view.
scale
which as
first
placed highest.
Each tone of
When we now
b, c,
consider
the
first (c, d, e,
(e, ^r, g,
&c.),
and
the fourth
(c, g, c,
chains,
we
find a phrase of
Four simultaneously-sounding
These four voices are called
Treble
(
voices.
Soprano)
or
first
voice.
Alto
Tenor
Bass
progression,
we
will repeat
No. 89 in
score.
100
are called
and Tenor)
voices.''''
B.
But
formed
scale
unitij.
it is
;
not
sufficient that
by
itself
should be well
together they
connection and
Is this
A
not
superficial unity exists already in the fact, that all the notes
But
this is
we know
A more
that
g,
of
Tlaus
we have
seen
om" two harmonic masses were connected by a mutual tone, first, second, and third chords connected
by the mutual
mutual
c,
the
g,
the
wanting.
is
third,
best
-9
90.
Again, the
thi-ee
important notes,
of page' '55
meet our
eyes,
find our
Tonic
as the
centre which connects these chords, and around which they move.
a'
scale
de-
Harmonic Designs.
Before
we
we must
101
take into consideration the harmonic designs which
we have
dis-
covered thus
far.
A, the progression
B, tire
other in
91.
nm
cliords of the
rTfT^ r
we know
that these
The
two
chords have been borrowed from keys which, though each related
D. Examining the
enth degree,
Faulty Progressions.
deficient progression
we
find still
1.
Firstly
ent path
from
e
to
<^
and
e ;
the
is
second from g to
repeated
;
and
to g, which latter
c.
m
92.
Ht
The alto says nothing different from the bass. Neither is mere doubling or strengthening, as we have seen it in our
it
first
attempts at duophonic composition (No. 49) ; for it is right in the midst of the other parts, and, like them, claims to be a separate
voice.
fiiult
the alto
is
neither
102
a separate voice nor a
mere doubling,
the
fol-
lowing
W:
93.
BE
r
false oT consecutive octaves
;
r
it
Progressions like those of alto and bass in No. 92, are called
variety of voices.
For
But how can we obviate the consecutive octaves in No. 92 ? The bass was indispensable we had for a and b no other har:
The
the alto,
/to g ;
ff-b-d, is
this
must
might
We
now remember
in reality
g-d-f.
We
therefore retain the /of the first chord in the second chord;
(7f=
94.
^^
no longer in octaves with the bass, and these two chords have now a mutual connecting-note, /
103
proportion
voices
;
is particularly
obnoxions
wlieii it is
unhidden by other
In future
we shall find these successions sometimes admissible we will avoid them. In the above case the fault
and tenor.
d.
In the octaves
we
;
avoided
fault
by
remain
here, it is
ing harmony.
solutely go
But
is
if it can neither
down
now wantmg
let
w
95.
-JSZ
ei
-^A
the
fifths,
We have
plete
now avoided
The former we have gained by contrary motion, the latter has given us opportunity to give to one voice two notes of the same chord, and thus to obtain greater animation. We
harmony.
will call such notes,
which enter
" harmonic
bye-notes.''''
There are
many
difficulty,
m
96.
s
we
:^-.
^
one illustrated in No. 95,
E.
new
104
notes
;
ff,
b, d, f.
is
mental tone.
We
-will
call
" Triads," of
viz.,
c-e-ff
"
"
Dominant,
Subdominant,
g-i-d
f-a-c.
"
The chords of four notes will he called chords of the Seventh, "Septime chords," because the added seventh distinguishes them from the triads. The one we have just now discovered upon the Dommant, will be of special importance, and to distinor
guish
it
from
we will
call it
the '^Dominant
It exists
at
no other
place.
2.
no other key
a key.
In the
g-h-d-f,
would be
c-e-g-b\t,
key of
d-f'^-a-c.
3.
the
a,
b,
C,
d,
e,
F.
B, B, F.
first
I),-F.
mass, and
all its
its
way
97.
its fifth
is
quite as near.
But we prefer
we do
not
105
like
to
double the
B.
third.
No.
98 a
is
No. 98
9a
W:
^
This proceeding of the dominant chord is called its " resolution,'" and of any chord that absolutely draws after it another harmony
we say, " it resolves into" such chord or harmony. With this we have at last accomplished the faultless
zing of the scale.
harmoni-
99.
It is
lacks the
;
We will
it
is
It
seems, further, as
there were
now no
two
and
c-e,
tual tone.
But
it,
this is
we have
prescribed direction.
106
100.
ii
":22r"
^
1=5
^-
T
1
We
with
(c).
not heard.
its
We
Subdominant
triad
An
still better.
Handel
;
downwards
for in-
from
-"
Israel in
Egypt :"
101.
^ ^S
-4-W^
-U4-
it
This
is
by no
means the only instance of great masters deviating from any given rules. Music as an art would be fettered indeed if her devotees were confined to the rules laid
the student.
down
for the
guidance of
is
admis-
sible or inadmissible
and
his taste
judges
whom
he has to consult.
above in the works of Haydn, Mozart, Beethoven, Mendelssohn Bartholdy, and a hundred others. But they are the
trations of the
masters
this deviation
it.
107
CHAPTEE
III.
A.
Limitation
to those
the
Ascending
Our
melody we give
viz.,
to the
first,
and
fifth
To each note of the we have found for it in No. 89, tones of the scale we shall always
and seventh that of the
of the subthe seventh,
sixth the triad
give
to the second
dominant
dominant.
by
we
by
dominant chord.
In order to facilitate the finding of the chords,
we
shall indicate
below the fundamental note of the chord is to be found. We have seen in Nos. 89 and 99, that the Tonic has for a fundamental note the lower octave, and mark it therefore by
figures
far
8,
by
how
fundamental notes
thus
we mark
by
5.
Ac-
G major
would be marked
102.^
tj
IS2Z
-a-
We
by
3.
exception of the sixth and seventh degrees, which are both marked
It is
the
differ
ent misproportions
for the present,
We will,
mark
by
f,
in order to
remember
the avoiding
fifths,
108
After this
we
find
As example we
This melody
5
3+3
83
83 55
zai -&e>-
^
has
fii-st
33
remembered
figures.
We have
;
also
the dangers
by
placing a
where we are
likely to encounter
them.
104. -e-
109
appears to us as a Period, with thesis and antithesis.
We
hare
The one
inant triad
dom-
B.
The Descending
to find an
Scale.
'
We
we fmd
will
now attempt
accompaniment
We
it
place our figures above the upper voice, and in accordance with
83 + 35 83
58
"25"
fcgzr
106.
m^
fifths.
-s-
-&?-!!-
-&
31
Everything
nection
is
from
con-
a),
where, again,
all
we meet
that the
aid us
no longer.
It is
new
faults.
follow,
were to change g-h-d into a dominant chord, c-e-g and h would have to go to c instead of a.
other means.
In order to avoid consecutive fifths and octaves,
we will attempt
iE
107.
zz^
BE
no
The alto would have to ascend to a and meet -with the treble, and the tenor would have to take/ But this would render the chord incomplete, and tenor and bass would make consecutive octaves from the third to the fourth chord (page 101),
A second
It is
it-
self.
come
into existence.
must
this
therefore ascend to a.
Trusting to chance
a triad.
we
construct
108.
Ill
no.
OF -di
Ileie, too,
3:
~:tl
we have
wrong
pro-
This loss,
may be
we
find
easily
ones,
that
alike.
The former
fifth
triads consisted
;
the
new
ones
fifth.
We will call the former major triads, the latter minor triads. We have now three species of chords, viz.,
1.
Major
triads
nantin C
2.
Minor
triads,
upon the
chord,
third
3.
in
C major, on ^and A.
upon the Dominant
in
majof
We
out
triad
now
The
fifth,
i.
e.,
with-
major
the
which
is
no
dispensed with.
With
this
is fulfilled.
We
E
can harmonize
melody
Here
8
is
another example
8
111. 8 3+3
3^.3
3+3
3+3
--.
1
-f
112
is
the
same
In
we have
the sixth measure we have made use of the proceeding in No. 110.
no con-
otherwise
well-established,
we
can
let it pass.
we permit
the
Why 1
make
will
Whenever
the
melody
as-
by
degrees,
we
&^^te-f^^=^ i
112.
i^i
In the course of our last remarks
we have
we wish them
to be considered as
synonymes
at least
until in
a future chapter
we
shall
its
be forced to
tinction
us
Fourth Part.
The freer use of the chords
at present in our possession.
for the
accompani-
Let us
Animated
present,
we know
raphonic chords, (in masses) and this does not agree with an
intellectually-animated inovement.
A phrase
Allegro
^to^ii
f=?
do very well for one. ox two voices (a or b) but it would be drowned under the tone-mass of four voices, witld their bass walkwill
it
worse
(b).
We have to be limited,
nies
therefore, to quiet
114
CHAPTEE
HAEMOmO
I.
DESIGlfS.
A.
mth
in the
upper voice.
the
115.
m
also.
Tlie
dominant chord
116.
^_-^&-
m
"S" "cr
-z3-
At a first glance the design of the last chord seems to be faulty, for we have admitted that the dominant chord must resolve into the tonic triad. But we can soon perceive that the moment of
proper progression has merely not yet arrived.
third,
-eis
We
see,
also,
imperfect
we have
employed two voices for the fundamental tone and its octave, and consequently have but two left for the most important The fifth is omitintervals of the chord: the third and seventh. ted, unless we give to one voice two notes in succession, as we have already done at No. 95.
115
A
118.
-<^-
m
B.
-^
Combination of Major Triads.
The
We
inant,
Dom-
and Subdominant.
We
Subdominant.
and we have borrowed the subdominant triad from the key of the Thus, though these three triads belong to one
key, they indicate three different keys.
keys.
These chords stand in the same relation to each other as the C major and G major, and major and i'' major are near-
and G, and
C and
F,
The keys of
major and
of
G and
Premising
we
find, therefore,
1.
which
we
can represent in
between the
\A
119.
-e-
3E
C-!
^
"Cr
_G
::s&:
!2_
^
120.
-&-&-
-22"23"
^
2.
"Og""
EiE
-&-
&c., &c.
between the
versa
:
triads of the
vice
-(9-
121.
""221
-&&- jSI
116
C.
The combination
the sixth,
and
an-
When we
examine the
we
find that
;
we
degree also
for instance, in
;
C
:
have
grees
now
;
triads
major upon d : df-a. Thus we upon the first, fourth, and fifth deupon the second, tliird,' and sixth
Upon
we can
construct
minor
wanting.
now
we
can
make
of
we must first
and that some have mutual notes among them, others not.
triad of
The
of
is
oif
g,
e,
remaining chords
by means
mutual notes.
As
thus the three minor triads represent three minor keys, which on
the, parallel
to its parallel
Each minor key, however, stands in the first degree of relation key (they differ only in one note) consequently, G
;
major and
.fi"
minor,
i**
major and
D minor,
and
sixth,
and
third,
and
belong together.
We have,
1.
therefore, again,
for instance,
* Parallel keys are those major and minor keys having the same signatures C major and A minor, G major and minor,' i*" major and I)
minor.
117
s122.
m
keys.
-s-
2.
Designs of more distant connection, or such which, though having mutual notes, do not represent nearest-related
.
&
123.
-d3.
124.
m 'Spnow we have
As
-&-
iS.^
33^
isgr-
D.
Till
the
We will
meets us
it in-
such
it
in a
The dominant
sign of a key,
triad.
we know
its
already,
is
and according to
serves as the
Let us observe
now how
125
^S-
m
iy
iszz:
rO-
3F^
:22z
In
A the
last
its fifth in the upper voict'. Such cadences are imperfect; they are
final
118
In the above cases we could not well do differently, therewhenever in the dominant chord the octave or third are in the upper voice, we shall have an imperfect cadence. If it is in the upper voice, it can either ascend into the third of
voice.
fore
it
we have again an imperfect, when the third of the dominant chord (as in e) is in the upper voice, we obtain, again, a perfect cadence, aud a stronger and a more satisfactory one
octave of the same.
in the second,
a,
In the
first
perfect cadence.
Finally,
than in d
fifth
The nearest
triad
dominant chord
is
the dominant
127.
Srlz
(a)
-0-
=i=
on account of
its intrinsic
connec-
After
this, all
making
this
all
our har-
monies.
-&128.
s-
-Sr
=i:
-<32-
E.
Every
according to
and consequently
Thus a
or
by
(a),
119
or
130.
-&---- -&- G-
fl
t f=F
Y'n
imm
one phrase
No. 119, if we wanted to employ all the chords in or they might be employed as here
131.
they require
in the
a harmonic Sequence.
132.
-- -
-#I
-#I
-#
-m-
133.
consist
A,
-Bz
t^MrS:
^
We
connect
mg
of the dominant chord and the tonic triad with their positions.
third
and
fourth.
120
the tonic and dominant harmonies, and write the bass, perhaps, in
this
manner
134,
P
135.
fea^
^m
by means of
near-
or in this
as far as
it is
The formation of such sequences is absolutely necessary to the who should practice them in all positions and in all keys, perhaps in the following manner also
student,
136.
s
i
iiii
^^m
rr
f-T
j-
special' destination,
when
Prelude,
harmonies in their
.
different positions.
121
'
g~
-s;
-3-
137.-^
-&~
"ST
for instance.
138.
122
CHAPTER
II.
We have formerly
it,
fifth,
octave, or seventh
Let us
now
reverse
either thirdj'
fifth,
octave, or sev-
C major, we
now
could
110).
But
it is
our object
A.
We
The
1.
ascertain
first
it
can be
third, fiilh, or
first
tone, C, can
;
be
2.
fundamental tone would be c, and the chord would be c-e-g. Third; in that case we have to seek the fundamental
Octave
in that case the
This would
make
it
a,
and
Fifth
we have now
;
degrees below
consequently
isf,
by
c-e-g,
140.
C,
^
d-f-a.
The second
1.
tone, d, can
Octave ; which
2.
Fifth
123
We
camiot consider
b,
it
as Third, because
i-d-f.
have major
while
a minor
fifth.
scale,
W-.
^S
three chords as accompaniment.
BE:
D only
/as
fifth,
nor b as fundamental
b-d-f,
which, for
new design.
We see
at
'^V
1?4
By
quiet.
this the
movement of our
more
is
most percep-
which
many
tone-repetitions occur.
These (as in a) cause repetitions of chords, and make the accompaniment monotonous, whUe the new mode (b) gives variety to
it.
this
144.
125
sign consistently through, deserve the
instance,
most consideration;
for
^N^
-f-
147.
-jj-
e;
Finally, he
must take
do
In this respect
we know
"
full
cadence
for instance, in
major,
with
148.^ ^^
^S=
^^^^-^
,
r
further
:
r
end with a half-cadence,
or perhaps
|
like
149.
M:
or with
-&-
150.
W-
--^z.
C3
g
b.
is
-&&-^
-J
These rules must
still
attended to in a as well as in
it
be well to
new
and
chords, faulty
after this, the
way
into
it,
B.
But
little
Like every
triad, the
dominant
126
chord can be used for every note contained in it but care naust be taken not to cause faulty progressions by it. We know that the dominant chord must resolve into the tonic
;
triad
deall
We
only -where
Thus
g of the
third
^
151.
r
BE
now attempt
.^
Let us
152.
at
a have
little
or no connection
they have
The two
d and/;
at e
we see
related
it is
At c it is introduced to d. The melody ascends from d to e, and the seventh of the dominant chord descends to e. Thus the succeeding triad has two thirds which are very perspicuous, and lacks the fifth. The latter is not of much importance,
through/.
and against the double third we have at present no help. We could have avoided this if it had not been our object to introduce the dominant chord as often as possible. At d we see the advantage of our
new
principle.
We have not
give
127
153.;
B^ Mski
r r r
'I
"
more convenient would have been the progression of b, though by it we should have lost the fifth of the dominant chord. Thus much of the dominant chord. We will make it a rule to effect our full cadence by it.
Still
The consequence was, that the tonic triad after Now, when we have to use it more it, invariably lost the fifth. frequently, and particularly for our cadences, we can permit some
according to rule.
slight,
Formerly we have
step;
we
will
now
when
the seventh
is in
takes the tone into which the seventh ought to resolve), to let the seventh ascend.
154.
r
e
which
final
,
this deviation,
we have gained by
Here we
it
a complete
The
see
it
descend
two
degrees
155.
m
would have
led, is alreadv
c,
128
taken by the treble, and we gain, by this slight deviation, the completeness of the second chord.
156.
^^
I
4=
when
r
lies
T r r T r
not so admissible
the tone
is
i
157.
r
Here the seventh
viation
e
is
in a
also.
But the
de-
not hidden, because the voices are too far apart, and the
expect in the alto
is
which
we
The
are,
1,
intervals of the
2,
but,
intervals have a
regular progression
cends a degree.
If,
now, two voices take the third or seventh, both will have to
158.
unless
we
it
thus
129
130
ques'-'
bidden
for
some of these
most simple
and indispensable progressions of harmony ; for natural harmonies and the necessary cadences.
instance, ia the
E
making
~s>
-f-
t-
sy
r^
nr-
it
ces,
But with the same right they might, under similar cireimistanhave forbidden the use of thirds, sixths,^ and sevenths, which can also become very conspicuous ; for iastance.
P
This very
-&-
^-
-00--^
fact, leads us to the solution of the whole question. Such progressions are only conspicuous and disagreeable when
by unmelodious, unnatural progressing of one or more when a voice instead of the nearest interval takes a more
one of the next chord.
voices
distant
interval
becomes conspicuous.
131
Fifth Part.
The Inversion of Chords.
Until now we have principally thought of the discovery and
connection of chords, while
we have
paid hut
little
attention to
We
;
placed the
but already
this rule
by
giving to a voice
was nearest to it. Our bass always seemed the least flowing and most unmanageable, because we had nothing but the fundamental notes of our
it.
harmonies to give to
same
voices
while
we will take third, fifth, or seventh of a chord in the bass, we give the fundamental note, or rather its octave, to an-
other voice.
the chord.
called inversion.
we
132
CHAPTER
I.
When
its place,
But it becomes only hwest tone, not fundamental tone for jundamental tone we only called that one which in the original construction (by thirds), was the lowest.
;
it
be above, be-
There are as
many inversions
;
2.
1.
2.
3.
^^W=W -^
E^
It
it,
P^TlT
Thus the
first
F
reis
inversion of a triad
we
brevity's sake.
has received this name, because the most imthe third and fundamental note, form
portant notes of
now
we
the
interval of a sixth.
most
Conto the
it
name
Thus the
shall call
first
and
sixth, or
Quint-sext chord, as
we
we count
it
133
by any change of
The two
first
ing are both called sext-chords, and the others are all called terz-
quart chords.
""W
no new
difficulty.
f-^-Tf=7
For
all
Thus when
we
still
said of the
its
and that
its fifth
162.
^
is
Jr
=*
rr
consider
it
n=f'
g re
?
There
Why,
we
is
and
its
progression
the Tonic
is
Besides this
otherwise represented."
it,
of the other
voices permits
we can
still
J163.
r
we
find that
dis-
though
this proceeding is
lowest voice.
When we
by them
their
proper and firm foundation, and that they lose their natural
clearness
134
tance of the lowest note from the fundamental same degree they partake of a mobility which
original chords.
tone.
is
But
ia the
foreign to the
fit
to be final
The latter particularly brings the tonic triad in so strange a position, that we wiU only employ it when we are led to it by the drift of the bass, or when we have particular reasons for it, of which we shall learn some in future. For the same reason neither quint-sext chord, nor terz-quart chord, nor secunda chord, are fit to prepare the end. Though they all must resolve into the Tonic, the strength of the step from
fundamental tone to fundamental tone in the bass
is
wanting
some even
we
we must
take a precautionary
As long
at
as
we placed
it
first
attempts
harmony made
necessary,
we
of chords.
for
we can
dom-
we have
the inver-
the
We require now a
is
what chords we have to carry out in notes. called figuring. The composer in his sketches often makes
of his work.
giving
possible to express in
it
would suffice to a degree, but it is imwhat we express in notes, and instead of that importance which many theorists attach to it, we
For
this it
it
we want
;
it.
We are
in the
already accustomed
first
to
way
harmonic mass.
Over or under the bass we place, therefiguring. For the present the few following
remarks will be
sufficient.
135
1.
no
however,
we
intend a
passage to be unaccompanied,
alone,
if the
s.
bass shall go on
we
t.
{(asto solo).
it is
When
all
marked alV
is in-
unisom, or
all' ottavij, ;
if
tended to be unaccompanied
2.
Septime chord
marked by
"
7.
e-
"
"
"
by by
by
by
\
^ ^
or
or
*.
|.
|.
or
"
by ^
no figuring,
The dominant
as
it is
of these
figurings,
were, of what
we
we
are not
voices.
For the
present, therefore,
we
will
figurings,
136
CHAPTER
II.
A.
1.
New
As we
we
inversions
164.
The quart-sext chord is here introduced, but we have been led to it by the bass which passes through all the intervals of a chord. The same proceeding can take place with the dominant chord,
165.
Y^
5
^T
3
"*
Y J
6
Formerly we dared not attempt a succession of triads in on account of the consecutive fifths and octaves which would make their appearance,
2.
I22I
166.
s:
:sr:
make
such succes;
and to employ them for new designs and passages and at the same time gives us means for the accompaniment of the
scale.
167.
!^
137
None of
tones with
it
is
true,
its
neighbor
new and
link.
The strong
drift
tetraphonic, either
by adding
168,
-I s
^'
or
by a middle
169.
$
is
iM^E^y
J J T r T f f
is
It is
No. 168
movement
of the middle
makes
it
movements.
4.
The
employed
in
a small
suc-
cession, like,
170.
j=^ rrT
f
it
The
figuring
of the above
is
we
dislike the
we
can
mark them by
figuring
J
171.
i i
:^
-f-^-^^-^-r-^^
See Appendix A.
138
tells
we
are to take a
sext chord.
B.
In the above
we have used
The
much
now
most easUy
combined in
their inversions
for instance,
172.
m
much
^
i
flowing than the
zz
gj
In fact, the
more convenient
makes some
;
combinations
thus
-3
173.
i
m
more important
after
is
-f-r-r
same
in their
steps.
are
much more
fundamental posi-
tion,
174.
d= =s
J-
r ^ T r r
^
Still
the formation of
new harmonic
passa-
ges,
which
easy.
what we have said of them will be comparatively Only as examples we give a few passages, produced from
we
first
of sext chords.
Each
chord
this
139
wu
175.
d:^
^^ff
?z:
s ss
r
I
p
zz
r W=F^
22:
&^
=P2:
The
176.
^^^ S
:=\-
r
?=
?^
We can
177.
i
i
-(9-
W^t^^
g
r;
=s
178.
~z5'
still
more
variety, which,
all
we
No. 173,
for
instance,
179.
^*iP ^
F=^gE
180.
&e. JffiC.
I
&ism^^
m
&o.
C.
or thus
^=i:
**
3:
See Appendix
140
We have already
181,
Efe^
T
is
Now
that
we
nevertheless
awkward.
Leading the
first
chord through
its inversions,
182.
ms
^=^
6
it-
we
the
offering us a
same time the fundamental tone of the dominant chord, thus much more flowing connection. We will prepare
full
our
is
it
us an awkward, but
more vigorous
preparation.
183.^
We have also
employed the subdominant chord for the more For it, too, the quart-sext
W.
184.
"7
9l
141
D.
The
new means
of avoiding
fault,
faulty-
progressions
for they
without
fording us to substitute a
new
chord.
IZC
185.
E3=
-&-
^
^
221
3
T
*=
4
SgE -&-&-
Hf=Fp
2
6
J. -& -.ztssz
Here we have avoided the faults attendant upon the sixth and not by alteration of the middle voices, nor by the addition of a new harmony, but simply by means of inversion.
seventh degrees
:
E.
A new
chord, the
Diminished Triad.
our consideration.
b,
offers itself to
The
Trusting to chance,
we
tenor to the
d of the next
chord.
186.
w.
i^^
-r
^
This brings us to a chord^the dominant chord without
its fun-
Fundamental
It
tone,
minor
third,
and minor
fifth.
is called, therefore,
Diminished Triad.
chord and quart-sext chord.
142
187
m
new chord
b (the
is
dominant chord.
Its
Consequently,
its
fundamental tone
c ; its fifth,
descends
one degree to
scend.
e ; its third
viations
But in Nos. 153 and 153, already, we have permitted defrom these rules, and we may therefore admit them in
-&isz:
i
b,
-OZ
-s=
and
c,
Here, at a,
sionally
we
may be
of the voices.
we must
de-
viate from the original law, and permit one of the original sev-
enths to ascend.
This
is
;
done best
at b it is
at a,
where
this deviation
more
perceptible,
and
at c it
full-
but
we
employ
it
movement of our
for instance.
189.
rr-frf^
* See Appendix D.
143
CHAPTER
III.
As
a matter of course,
faulty manner.
we cannot introduce any chord in a And we must consider as faulty the entrance of which we have no reasons, or which does not aj/'
manner of harmonization therefore, too, we must what 'lies nearest to us, and thence arrive at the more disbut
tant
we
reason,
We
chords.
think
first
of the fundamental
its inversions.
when we remain longer in the harmony of the fundamental chord. Moving from one harmony into the other
These we
We
will again seize the fundamental chord of this latter, unless its
of the bass, or of the middle voices (No. 189), or the object of writing flowingly (No. 186), or fear of crowding severe successions, &c.,
is
induce us to employ the inversions. The method of practice for this third species of harmonization the same as that for the second. Another treatment of No.
147
may
sei-ve as
example
144
CHAPTER
IV.
Ths
bass a
more
flowing
melody
and
for this
We know
already
and that they neither disturb nor change the inner characterof such intervals.
istics
at
a are as admissible
as those at b.
_2_ ?~
193.
m
BE
m
occasionally
is it
in
We have
What
employed them. at a ?
our sensation.
They seem no longer pressed closely upon each and have thus become softer and more
transparent.
more
play,
It is evident, also, that in this form the voices have and can move more independently.
is
called the
harmony.
We know already where the chse and where the dispersed harmony has the advantage. We shall, at least, never employ it where
it
If
we
begin, therefore,
with the
we must do
continue
it,
whether
we can
or whether there is a
place to in-
145
The moment we
But not
If
all
open
for us.
in-
If
we
spread the
we
we
place
some or
harmony
we
place
them
all
in the lower
its
Nature, however, in
own harmony,
-9194.
we may
safely follow.
--^
146
Wwm
6
6
ijj-ij
a
iij.jjijj.j;i.
t
26
3
6-
But
ing
first
we must
same harmony
as in the second
The above, for comparison's sake, is treated at a in the first manner. At b we have treated it in the third manner, with employment of the inversions, but
in dispersed
harmony.
and
the'
Above
all,
we
Only
is
rather
more
distant
But
this
new manner
all
According to the Jirsf manner of harmonization. According to the second manner of harmonization, and
2.
close
harmony, and
4. In dispersed
harmony.
passages, of which
we have had
several already.
;
"197.
zzL
or thus
See Appendix C.
147
^EB
198.
&-
:si
A: zU
s-
:iii
~A
J-
4 -J
Pff ^f. r
:^
l9-
BE
^.^E^EidE=
RETROSPBCTION.
I F=FfF=PFf
With
scale.
1.
this
we
:
close the
It
has given us
the major, minor, and diminished, with their in:
Triads
versions
2.
inversions;
Quint-sext, Tere-
and Secunda
chords.
We have learned to combine these chords in various manners, and to form with them phrases, passages, and periods. The de-
we
will
now
call
MODULATION.
We had to
all
the requirements of
Voice-progression.
But instead of this we have learned how to find for one given melody three accompanying voices. We must attach one more observation to all our former results.
We
scale.
At
first ^Y0
accepted
as
;
it
to us.
justification
We
is
Thi'ee
148
major, three minor, one diminished triad and the dominant chord,
together with
all
means
tained.
and
all
we have
perfect cadence, the maremind us of the nearest-related keys, and means for half cadences and imperfect cadences.
We
can
fit
now
must be
tion of phrases
and periods.
close this chapter without drawing the atten-
tion of the student to the fact that it is absolutely necessary for to play over all his compositions and exercises. In dispersed harmony, particularly, it will require some practice to do full justice to the different voices. These voices are all alike important, and should be played with precision and equality of strength.
him
When thus practising, the student should watch the effect of every chord, and the results of this attention will be a better command
of means than can be acquired in any other way.
149
8ixth Part.
The Harmony of the Minor
1
Scale.
CHAPTER
THE
FOEMATIOlir OF
I.
We
have
justified
tonic
triad.
Upon
and
we found
also
major
triads,
C-e-g
g -
b~d.
c c
fC
d
e
a a b
fg
was contained the complete major scale. major scale we found some minor triads.
But already
in the
We ought therefore to
scale ought to
jor triads upon the Tonic, Dominant, and Subdominant, the minor
have minor
points.
These
chords, in
A minor,
would be
e - g -h d-f-a.
A,
b,
c,
d,
e,
f, g,a.
But in that case the minor scale would lose that most important of all chords, the dominant chord ; for the latter is based upon a major triad. Consequently we must change the minor triad of
the dominant into a major chord
e-g-b,
;
for instance in
e-g}^-b.
A minor,
;
into
For
this
proceeding only
we have
sufficient
reason
150
above analogous formation. Were we to subdominaat also into a major one {d-f-a into d-f^-a), the minor scale would differ in but one chord and tone from the major scale.
we mil
retain the
in regard to
it so.
from /to
g'jf,
by
substi-
tuting/I for/ the distinction of tone-sexes is almost completelydestroyed. It has therefore been concluded to write the ascending
minor
scale,.
A.g,f,e,d,
There, however, are in reality
c, b,
a,
two
different
minor scales; or a
minor
scale in
A,
b,c, d, e,f,f^,g,g'^,a;
We shall
above
g!^,
g^ as
we need
not use
it
/, &c.), or
we
take the
g!^
Later
we
means to introduce in major or minor foreign chords and tones. It wiUthen depend upon us to avoid this obnoxious progression, by raising the sixth, or by lowering the seventh degree. But for the present we shall win from it several important
shqjl find
discoveries,
inadmissible.
Harshness,
in sounds.
Note.
subject.
pendixes
The student here advised again to read over carefully the ApA and B, that he may have a clear understanding of the whole G.
151
CHAPTEB
II.
manner
at
first
Wk have now to find harmonies for our new scale in the same We will as we. formerly found them for the major scale.
follow our figures above the melody, and avoid the
85
3+3
:si: 200.
-|S>.-
?=
221
^
faults
Here
zation.
_first
manner of harmoni-
sixth
more difficult in the descending scale for in addition to all mer difficulties we have now the harshness of progression in
scale itself
for-
the
No. 108) the second chord, and thus avoid consecutive octaves and fifths,
(as before in.
We might cha,nge
-h
201.
m
that, too, at
melody breaks,
as it
We
by
their chords.
We
;
attempt^
chordj
many
first
202.
-k
m
for the succeeding tone of the
melody,
153
we will place the two upper tones have a new harmony before us,
in a
lower octave.
Here we
e-9l-bf,
which even exhibits the normal construction, with the exception Our second harmonic mass has of the vacuum between h and/ already exhibited to us such a vacuum, by the filling of which we
Here too, therefore, we will fill the vacuum with the intermediate third d, and have thus a new chord
gained the dominant chord.
oifive tones
e-g^h-d./
we
.........
#g=
;?:
203.
P
BE
object
is
s=
-&-
221
Our main
to
now
we have
introduced
This leads us
The
fifth
it
from
all
former chords,
it
is
the
name
we have
is
already
known
to us.
We
can ima-
is
may
In the following
153
204.
^
BE
:22=
-2I
--
=lte
more
distinctly
descend,
fifths.
we
place
it
consecutive
It
(Compare a and
now remains
inadmissible in
satisfac-
it
might not at
all
times be
we have
formerly done.
205.
J^
r
now
best be omitted
tone, third, seventh
^
?
Which
fifth.
Undoubtedly the
are too significant,
Fundamental
all
is decidedly the most characteristic tone. The harmonization of the minor scale is thus completed, and
we
can practice
it
in the following,
below.
6 5 8 8 3 8
3+9
5 3 8 3 5
3+3
154
CHAPTEE
III.
chord
is so
it for
we would we have
In
third.
mi-
would be
g-h-i-f-a\,.
If we
third to our
dominant chord in
C major, it
would be
g-h-d-f-a ;
and thus we have obtained a nonachord in major, constructed from the tones of the major scale. It is only distinguished from
the nonachord in minor
by
is
minor,
it is
major.
We will
But since the major nonachord, is constructed exactly as the minor jiona chord, it follows the same rules.
207.
^
-2-
-0-
^-
ZS2Z
-&-
The Fundamental tone goes to the Tonic The Third ascends The Seventh descends The Ninth descends and The Fifth, if helow the ninth, must ascend (a), otherwise it would create consecutive fifths. If above the ninth, the reason of
;
groimd
(b)
and
ascend or descend.
En passant, we
chord
is
must
figuring
this
marked
9,
from
most important
interval.
155
Inversions of the Nonaohord.*
at
positions
we have
seen already in
the above.
But the
way.
It
we
into
confusion.
-2208.
-go-
:si^gg^^
many
-g--
209.
troubles and
carefully,
^ much
^" hesitation. We
"23-
them.
omission of the
For the
We
new Septime
In the
chords.
same manner we gained formerly the diminished triad from the dominant chord. Below are the two new septime
chords, as the issue from the nonachord.
210.
m
;
The latter only deserves a new name, because by and by it will become important and since the diminished triad is contained
therein,
we
will call it
We need hardly mention that the intervals of this chord follow the same laws as those of the original nonachord, i. e., the
* See Appendix E.
156
fundamental tone
h
fifth
(former sev-
These new septime chords can be inverted without and without requiring further rules.
311.
diificulty,
What
intervals,
we
;
omitted or doubled
4
212.
-e-
&.
-ei tfe
A
"^
-G>-
i&
te
1
m3 r
Former
'
Y
have prided themselves no
theorists
little
on their
tal-
ent of inventing
names
new
formation.
We
Any
little
be
figuring.
We
know
that the
and
if
most important intervals of these chords, we represent them in our figuring it will be all-sufficient.
157
CHAPTEE
IV.
We
cies triads,
are
now in
All the
We
also
know
the
by
itself,
and
in
combina-
new harmonic
mer
instructions can
;
be easily found.
One only
shall
be indica-
ted here
214.
m
We
:i=
-&-
'^
new manner
of avoid-
215.
E
T r
,
.
--
/goes
to a instead of
because
tfie
a nonachord.
whence
it
issued.
However
brief
we
can
make our
instructions
by
reference to
158
the preceding,
it is still
and to employ them in the formation of sequences and preludes, and particular attention should be given to the harmonization of
given melodies.
To
this
we add
1.
Major Melodies.
for
them
Both chords may be applied to all the tones contained therein, if it can be done without causing confusion and faulty progressions,
for instance,
^feStfifS
N
6
' 1
rrrE^ '
J
h
4
i-^J-
U JJ
6 7
=^
6
2 6 3
--
4 5
2.
Minor Melodies.
more thorough
compass.
As introduction it would be well for the student to construct, from the chords of the minor scale harmonic designs and sequences, as
many
as he possibly can.
Then he ought
to treat every
159
given melody in two manners.
First according to thej^rsi
it,
man-
i.
e.,
by choosing
of,
his chords
We give here
have no room.
an example
we
217.
^iite^i
'M
EBtt.
isi -i
5
'^i
t -l^
6
tl8
H3 1
4.,
M^
3E
-M-li
iEk^ ?=
i^=S--
'&Uf.
^-i:
S*-
ife^
4
t!3
:p t|6
2 6
m
C mi-
4 5
H4
4-a^
87
We find in
the figuring
require an explanation.
Until
all
our chords
very well.
Bnt
in
minor
scale,
accidentals.
In,
d would indicate the sext chord d-f-bb. minor, and we, therefore, our scale of
6, in
b},
into
Jt|.
If
Thus the
(not
wanted.
If the
key were
triad d-f^-a.
them
%, $, 4, 0,
jS,
%.
160
3.
We
have
now completed
first
Among
all,
their
septime chords.
voices,
was allowed to
our next object
will permit the
make
It is
now
We
fifth
of the succeeding
tone (b)
or
may
chord, instead of its fundamental tone (c), while the seventh (cov-
ered
by
taves,
voices (d).
218.
P^
219.
is less
rr
Talso participate
^i i =F=^
admissible, because the accompanying ninth
* See Appendix F.
161
SeTcnth Part.
Modulation into Foreign Keys.
far
moved
'within the
compass of
any-
must
call
e.,
we we must
composition.
combine the tones and harmonies of two or more keys in one The technical term for this proceeding is " fo modulate into foreign keys,"
or "
to
modulate."
two
different
it
ways.
We can
remain in
it
key
therefore, in a
new key, use one or a few chords, we have a mere " digression." composition in major we would introduce
the
In that case
220.
which are not indigenous to that key, but which would have been
touched merely accidentally, without actually exchanging
jor for another key, these foreign chords
sions."
raa-
would be
How to
how
to classify them, or
how
and to se^e
it
distinctly another
whole.
162
CHAPTEE
I.
We
tones and harmonies of the one for those of another aes harmonies
instead of
for instance,
C major,
'^i
<^>
fi
ffi
with
its
((7,
ff,
F\
&c.,
a,
we take
'
A major
a,h,
c\,d,e,f%g%
with
its
But we perceive immediately that much is here mixed' up wMch The two keys, however distant from each other, have several tones in common (a, 6, rf, e), which tones, therefore, they are not distinguished from each other, and in which we do not perceive that C major has beeir excMnged for A major. These mutual non-distinguishing tones need not,, therefore, be touched. The remaining three, /|, cjf, g^, indicate the transition. But even in our monophonic phrases we have already used foreign tones without exactly exchanging one key for another. We require a more distinct sign of transition than mere single tones. This we can only expect from that harmony in which we have discovered the first conception and the foundation of keys. But which are the harmonies which serve us as the surest sign of a transition ? Those which surest indicate their key. Therefore
might be called superfluous.
iiii
it,
and the
we
say that
we
have entered
its
key^
attach all further observations at once to the first transitionchord, the " dominant chord," and then pass on to the others.
We
163
1.
exist in
in
no other.
If,
one modulation a
makes
it is
its
e-g!^-b-d,
we
can
in major, or in any key but A. The dominant chord is the distinct sign of the introduocion of its key. But it is no sign for the tone-sex for in major and minor it is exactly alike. The above dominant chord tells us dis-
be
tinctly that
we
are no longer in
(7
major, but
it
is
undecided
whether
we
are in
A
;
major or
if a-c|-e,
minor.
This
to
is
only decided by
if a-c-e,
we have gone
A major,
we
are in
A minor.
is
it
must
inin-
be the decisive means to modulate into its key. If we tend to modulate therefore into any other key we have but to
troduce the dominant chord of the latter.
major or A minor, we have to modulate from any key into but to introduce the chord e-g^b-d, and since the dominant chords of major and minor are exactly
major or minor.
alike,
we
are at liberty to go to
We
know
the domi-
modulate into the same. But this modulation must be effected in the course of a composition,
Not
must be avoided, but the chords shall also appear We must bring the transition-chord (the domiwell connected.
progressions
new key)
by mutual
necessary,
first
of
all,
to
It
of the prece-
have
tonic triad.
Our
be attached to major or minor triads. major triads and three minor triads. major and two minor triads. Here
We
In
164
221.
EES
^
more tones
:S=^E1E::
'-^=W
we
a the six triads of G major, and at b the four triads of minor to which a transition-chord could be attached. It is clear that we can attach to each of these chords any transee at
in
common
with
it.
With
the chord
c-e-ff,
for instance,
we can
dominant chords
222.
m
the
*
preceding key,
D\,,
B\,,
-&&&
h,
W
because
it
brings us back to
:
we have
still
to
F,
D,
G,
A, B, and
'A\,.
We
tion that
we have used
intend
c-e-g,
we
now
to
make
stance from
from
first
C major
5-c?|-/|-a,
we make use of a mediator. In going we would require the chord which has noTnutual tone with c-e-g. We, therefore, go
to E, for instance,
to another chord in
mon
is
with the dominant chord of S, and which at the same time connected with the chord c-e-g. Of such chords there are sev-
eral,
in*
G major
and
J-rf|-/}f-a.
i=
m
1
z^z
W-.
-fr =^^
feE
^3Z
165
It is
mediations
lies
the one at e
is
common
it
with the
first
chord,
and
key.
is
However, the connection by means of tones in common, (as already know) is merely external. A more intimate relation exists between such chords as indicate nearly-related keys. Since a major or minor triad always reminds of that key in which it is the tonic chord, we must consider those chords -which remind us of the to-be-expected key, or indicate the way to it, as
we
reminds us by
itself
we
D and e
direction,
i. e.
keys with
ation, while at
d and e
At b, therefore, we see the nearest mediwe find the most distant ones.
Finally
we must
may
contain so
many
foreign tones
less foreign
tones
is
desirable.
we
shall
now make
by
;
use also of
arbitrarily changing
for instance,
major
to minor,
:
triads
in
c,
major
chord
c-e-ff
in
c-e\,-ff,
a-c-e in a-cj(-e.
the
dominant chord
a\,-c-e])-g]},
by means of c, was
C major,
;
on
ac-
we
stance, at
224.5fe^==
-@-
^ ^jp
.-
Z2=
-tr--^
-|S>-
fe ^ pE
-#-
-&-
---
Sr
321
=i-=
W^-ft
166
the chord
c-e\,-g,
gain not merely an additional mutual tone, {c-e\,) but obtain also a harmony -vphich reminds us of C minor, and brings us
nearer to
Sh major
than
major.
;
At b and
g.
we
find other
at
No. 222,
proceeding
late
is,
to write
down
first
any key, the most practical the chord ^om which we modudominant chord of the
this the
key
ting
which
we wish
B, the
to modulate.
from
C to
first
225.
S:
fe fe=
=fe-
226.
3t-&- -3-
iSj
-& -&&-
MP
'ZSl
Then we must examine whether these two chords have sufficient connection.
G major. If the connection of the two is not satisfactory, a glance at the chords will soon suggest a harmony which conand to
nects the two chords.
Thus in the above (b), we have first interthen the major chord, a-c|-e, and finally have taken the dominant chord of B. We must be careful, however, to place the foreign tones in that
posed the minor triad
a-c-,
it most conveniently, i. e. which has formerly had the same degree now to be raised or lowered. Thus in No. 225, a, we have given c| to the upper voice which had c and aj} to the lower voice which had o. A strict adherence
According to the above developments, the dominant chord gives us the following modulations or transitions into all the dif ferent degrees of our tone system.
From Cto
167
femployed the nearest and best mediating chords. Mediating for every particular case and its application to minor keys, and the exercise in diflferent positions of chords and
other keys
is left
to the
pupiL
Each of these modulations, as we know already, can lead to minor as well as to major and, as a matter of course, the keys of B\), E\, F\^ &o., can he exchanged at any time for their enharmonic representatives C|, i)|, G'b, &c. We must now speak of a modulation which does not strictly
;
for
suffice. We have reference to the major and minor of the tonic, (for instance, C major and Cminor.) The dominant chord which the two keys have in common is cer-
we
could
seize.
228.
TM
its
such
229.;
168
triad, (b)
transition
from minor to
2.
THE BrONACHORDS.
contain the
Since
these chords
complete
dominant chord,
modulating
fur
facilities, for
nish us the
only that
difficult
to manage.
But on account of their nature they have the additional advantage of being at the same time indicators of the tone species into which we modulate. The major nonachord leads us to expect major (a), the minor nonachord indicates ininor (b).
23o.a^^3^3i;
-bpg-
we
of considering
major or minor.
-&-
-&-
S-
S-
-&-
S-
That the resolution (a) No. 231, is less satisfactory than the one of (b) 231, is apparent, and that the one of 231 (c) is more
satisfactory than the
one 231
(b), is apparent.
3.
the nonachord, and consequently indicates that chord and the dominant chord as well as the key. Nevertheless it has not the perfect characteristic decision of others
;
according to
;
its
tone-contents,
it
can exist as
for instance
h-dfa can be
doubt
is
in
A minor as
major.
But
this insignificant
soon silenced
169
by
already
in-
Thus, for
is
the
resolution
of
h-d-f-a
into
major, as at a,
is
per-
fectly satisfactory,
sible,
232.
ii
but requires a certain confirmation as at c. Independent of these deviations, however, the septime chord
furnishes
its series
instance to
~^*"~
233.
D
-&^"
Si=
fei::
m
is
M m:
tonic.
Ab
4.
We
chord,
it
know
that
chord
latter
Consequently
belongs to
and characterizing
it
modulations.
With
used in major.
234.
:^=
--ii
=a^
-M-#-
--^i:i^---
-m-
--
-0-
If this deviation
were not so
trivial,
it
would, according to
But in
re-
turn
it
Ac-
cording to
it
one key
minor.
5.
We
have
first
170
omitted fundamental note h-d-f, for instance, appeare.d to iis as But since the diminished the incomplete dominant chord of G.
;
we can also derive it from this chord by fundamental tone and retrace it to the key of the diminished septime chord. For instance, J-c^ referred to g-h-dr-f,
one above the other,
omitting
its
C minor.
e-g^-b-d-f,
key of A minor.
see
We
by
this
though sharing
indicated keys
stance,
The succeeding chord only tells us which of the two was meant. The following modulations, for in-
235.
=2Z^fi
i; -&Smajor or minor
^^
J3\,,
A,
ejif*,
dingly to B, G, F^,
minor
(or major.)
236.
4
Only the
follows in reality.
/*
fU
tell
final chord's in
us what key
Our
ear,
Thus
it
if in
we
trace
to g-b-d-f,
is
nearer related to
G major
same chord occurs in ^minor, we trace it to g^-b-d-f, and expect A minor, because this latter key is much nearer to minor than major.
But
if the
A minor.
6.
sub-species is in possession
171
of.
The chord
major,
D major, C major,
that the
or
C minor.
dominant
triad, if
be
of modulation
fundamental tone.
Thus
it
here at a
237.
A
it
minor.
But
resolves im-
harmony, it indicates sufficiently the minor to C major. Certainly it might also as at B have been led to major or even D, and this is exactly the lack of decision which we have mentioned. But even here, our
modulation from
it
expects the
first
modulation to
major, because
or
stand only in
more
distant rela-
7.
Finally this chord can also be the sign and means of a modulation,
it
provided
it
contains one or
more
foreign tones.
By
this
moment
no longer, and
nous
we
is
indige-
238.
172
We need not
for-
to remark, that
we have
is so
to consider
in three
of which
itself
productive
we have
by
We construct with them, independently, new formations. We use them in more extended and well constructed formar
tions.
173
CHAPTER
INTEODUCTIOlSr OF
II.
We
in
combining
dis-
tinction arises
We
indi-
must
distinguish
We might call
them
The
more or
less
Our harmony,
it faciliates
therefore, will
have to
be constructed so that
the
new
key.
How
this is to
Once arrived
new key we
it
treat
it
for
no further instruo
It
or
adnqjts
3.
of one or
'
more
digres-
we
shall
and
into
shall rather
more
distant keys.
Having arrived
i.
in the
new key we
proit
e.,
we
prefer remaining in
new
key.
A.
The
melody.
1.
EXTBENAL CHARACTBEISTICS.
melody.
If in a
These consist
melody
174
Q major the tone f\ makes it's appearance, we consider it as no longer in C; for the tone/| is foreign to the key of C major. Having arrived now by means of this tone at another key, O
in
makes
its
appearance,
we have
major
no /
this foreign tone of the
melody lead us 1
we cannot answer with complete certainty. We suppose at first we have arrived in the key in which the foreign tctoe first appears. Proceeding from C major, for instance, we
would consider f\,
but to
major,
not as leading to
major,
E minor, &c.,
A
c| in (7
O major,
we do
as the
first
appears.
major or
B. minor, c\ is
but as belonging to
indigenous.
first
all
mere suppositions
we
make
quite
diffei'-
239.
i
C
-J-
^
major to
O major
(a), it is true,
but
it
^ minor (b).
240.
At some
viz.
:
future time
we shall even
indicates neither
2.
INTEBNAL CHARACTBRISTICS.
all
These are based upon the regular progression of tion, and upon the principles therein developed.
moduladigres-
To
sion,
wit
as soon
as
we
of
we
is
interpret
it
modulation, and
among
we
select that
one
which
175
responds with the laws of construction,^
led,d
Accordingly
we would
major to
If
est related,
and not to
minor.
/
to
again appears,
we
should go to
major, as the
Even
if
melody contained no
we would
if,
aslc
same key
for instance,
:
melody of a
first
part in
C major
241,
176
But at
for
We
is
we were limited to the indigenous chords. have now a much larger field for such investigation
fifth,
seventh, &c.
C, for instance,
244.
i
2.
^s '&-
^.
=p^
-&-
Third of three
triads, three
chords.
245.
&
3.
^
'--'
W--
1?"
M ^
>fe-
Fifth of three
triads, three
chords.
246.
I^a^^a
4.
*
"~
I
fe^=F*=
247. -TT
lo
"
"gF
,si
5.
w.
:M
b!
We have discovered,
monies
177
C.
to
how many
used for every tone of a melody, and the question arises which of
them we have to choose, or which to exclude. Our general rules wUl be sufficient for the present. No chord should be chosen, the introduction of which would cause faulty progressions the connection of the harmony must be retained, and each, must be con;
The
rest will
of our labors.
Our first care next to this, will be to preserve the unity of key, and the turning points of the modulation. We .shall, therefore, end with the dominant chord and the tonic triad, and generally
,
latter,
while
we
shall
mark
of the dominant.
shall
we
always think
more
distant
255.
i
n
^f^fe
S
6The first chord remains unchanged. The second tone we consider The d immeis fifth of a triad which brings us to A minor.
9
6 f6
fcl
b5 6
4-7
diately after,
[g\-b-d-f)
we
consider as
fifth
chord
g-h-d.
We
it
we accompany the preceding e with the or we can consider it as tonic triad chord c-e-g, {vide No. 195) of G, in consequence of which we have to modulate into it. Accordingly we treat the tone e as ninth of the chord (i/|-a-c-e, or
major, and in that case
;
as seventh off-orc-e.
d, than from c to /|. occupied the parallel and dominant pi-incipally in the Having
178
first
part
we
turn
now
to
some other
modulate.
but
all
we
in order to
Being once in
minor,
we might accompany
o-c-e ;
chord
but since
is
tone into
it
by
its
c this
require
no
further explanation.
by no means
c.
arbi-
No. 255, as at
256 or continued
as at b or
256.
somewhat
like this
257.
we
179
takes
away
to introduce as
many keys as
We must further remark that in finding these foreign chords we have observed a two-fold proceeding. At first we enquired
which chord was suitable to
lected chord.
this or that
melody, and retained the key into which we were led by the
Then again
in the antithesis,
we
consulted what
keys
we had
which woujd bring us into the other nearest-related keys. Finally, 'it is clear that the above treatment is by no means
the only one possible.
With
infinity.
new
we
give a
triad.
IPW^m^^Grt^
I
it^zMizat :tT=^:
!J
3ti^--
:d.t::-.
'^
6 3
tl
m
\,1
Jalii--
bbY
b6
mm
Ul^-d
iW
(2d measure),
thesis closed
i 5
No
sooner had
we touched
flats
The
upon the dominant it is true, but not before a chord from C minor found room, and the antithesis touched upon G minor, minor, and JF major. The third tone of the second measure has two chords (and consequently two figurings) beneath it. This is no fault, for we can rhythmically dissect every tone and treat it as tone-repeti-
tion.
But in
final
cadence,
we
180
have led one of the intervals of the triad into the seventh (/), and thus satisfactorily ended the phrase. Figuring of two or more chords.
How
can
?
we
harmonies
^
5,
By
douhle or triple
figuring
in succession.
(by
5
3, 3,
We have already,
finds its
It is
at a
way
(Page 166.)
(mi contra fa), and has
we can-
it
a few remarks.
first
one,
it
appeared.
we
consider
it
better to write
as at A,
-*
E
r
than to write as at
b.
r
it is
Now,
pressed
if the
now
raised or de-
by
accidentals,
^
we
r r
'
^^
For
this reason
181
the notes
alto)
e}),
/|,
and
c|,
and
c.
this natural
proceeding, and
give the altered degree to a different voice from the one which
Mz
i^
!
rt mi rr i--^r-r
c the treble stands in
l^z
=F=is
and stand to each other in an unnatural relation. Thus at a and B the treble seems to stand in C major, while the bass is in C
minor.
in Z> or
At
D
G
major.
At d
C and
is
minor,
major.
called
Former
much
stress
upon
it.
;
this
We,
not
re-
we never
may
These reasons
we
will
now
point out.
A cross-relation is
case, or
gress flowingly and naturally, and because the key of the one
contradicts that of the other voice.
Whenever such
is
not 'the
when
by
advantage,
we shall
In pointing out
altera^-
Here,
at A, the
upper voice cannot go to /| with the lower voice, withHaving once admitted the doubling of /in
182
the
first
chord
directions.
we must of necessity lead the two fi The same is the case at b, c, and d. But
in different
it is exactlj'
because ol this necessity and because the voices are led as naturally
and
and can hardly be counted among the cross-relations. This relation is also covered or smoothed over, when the contradictory tone has the appearance of a
as at A,
newly entering
voice,
-3.
fe
:d^i-4-
3^;
I
I
^=0=F+=if
or
when
the
different,
but near-related
tones, as at b.
relations can
we can see how easily such crossbe avoided and how much milder and flowing the
At
c,
however,
is,
when
W-Si
ir
Here, in the
u
--^
is
m
I
j^_
ff
c
rrfand
first
we
the
consider
cjf
as different links,
and permit
If in either
it
serves
only to
more
ip-jz
fe^
-J-
r^UT
5S
fe^
T
r
it
183
is
As
a further illustra-
tion,
we quote
G major
:
theorists.
s; m^
r
-
OES
in a mysterious,
jor.
^- p-rrf~f
^ ^^
and keeps us in anxious
gloomy manner, before entering the fresh C maThe second entering voice leaves us uncertain whether c-f-a\) {F minor), or c-eh-a\, {A\, major) will appear. The succeeding
this
voice decides for the latter, and with the next voice (the treble)
Mozart breaks
to
harmony
at once,
tinues.
Who
it
forms a
is abso-
composer ?
If
Mozart had resigned the a\) or the a^ of the higher voice, the character of his phrase, and the analogous succession of his voices would have been lost. For the same reasons cross-relations are well applied, when we use them in slow harmonic sequences and sharp and weighty
modulations, for instance.
IZt
m
harshness,
m
#==
I 22
te
3i
-CZZisr.
^32:ja
ife
its
^=#=
184
progressions (which are based upon the omission of the resolution-
i
And
thus
^
we
t -^
^=1_
mz
.
:^i
understand
why
cross-relations
are permitted
which, considered
dictory, but
by themselves,
As one
many
instances,
we
minor,
by Sebastian Bach.
BF
^^==^=^ l^^^to m
^;
Wg^
drf ^^^p^-
-CET
Pm^
i3
3^
d^
m
It is
4^
^^ -^t^=^-^-=gg fes
evident that the cross-relations
the
j/^/ff)
5^1
d again
from $ toal;,
marked f, could not be upward pressure ii'om d to a, bb, b, in the lower and middle
upper voice.
Until
now we have
but tlte same relation can extend ; above the second to a third chord, and in such case it is called an
chords in immediate succession
indirect cross-relation.
Here
185
JJ!J-JJ UJfl
' I
I
h
'
[I
we
at c
movements which
first
act
upon us as
is
cross-re-
lations,
and
voices.
Why does
Firstly,
the cross-relation 1
e\!-d-c,
g-f-e,
as
well as formerly,
is
belongs to
C major.
melody of C minor, while g-f-e For the same reason the phrases b and f, in
which passing-notes take the place of intermediate chords, make no favorable impression.
Secondly, because the dominant chord
tinguish major
is
not sufficient to
dis-
it
186
CHAPTER
CHORDS.
III.
or in con-
We
know
work and we require only a practice of the same, in order to become familiar with the various chords. For this purpose only we give below a few examples.
already
to go to
;
how
Continuing
it,
we
259.
new key
Simultaneously
it is
with
this,
same can be done in various manners. The modulation into the key of the minor third above, issuing from C, would lead us to E\,, <rb, or F\, A, and back to C. The modulation into tha minor third below.
easily seen that the
260.
8va.
would lead us from C to A, iff, JE], or D and back to C. The modulation to the key of the major second above, would
jj,
give us
187
In the fourth measure the dominant chord ought to have been
<^|-/
tion
led us to
G'jf
major
the continua-
262.
Eg
f"-=*T
which has brought us into
in the modulation to
ten, B'^
6^1 major with eight, A\ major with major with twelve sharps, and would have involved us in an infinity of signatures. Instead of this we have enharmonically
e])-g-i])-d\i,
keys with
less signatures.
the sub-second
263.
last
passage
While
until
now we have
moved
we
major, &c.
264.
or, vice
versa,
from
C
B
to B,
either in the
upper voice,
(as in
below
a
265.
&a.
^^^^#ii Tf
ripf
188
or into another voice, and regulate
cordingly.
scale,
the remaining
voices ac
Or,
we
Eh
&Z.
flats,
as
may
be most convenient to
It is clear that
us.
such exercises
ca^be extended
exhaust them
is
almost impossMe.
The
to him, be-
some of the tones strive downward, and vice versa. Thus No. 261 and 264 were comparatively easy, because we always returned to the same position, and a
cause in ascending modulations
single design sufficed to carry us through.
we
in
we
began, and
we only changed
first
the posi-
But
No. 266
position,
it
was
different.
Placing the
triad in a different
we
in a different position.
I
267,
i
we
ld=
Ai
list
%\
r ^ wis
T r
every
masterillui-tra-
268.
189
in dispersed harmonies,
^ ^ir^^L^dS=^ Fg=J Q^
T'-
^
ztzi
=*
to
carry-
we
leave
to the pupil
The
to the chords.
must not be
all
limited, however,
Thus far, though we have discovered extended combinations, we have obtained nothing essentially, new. We will now pro;eed to the actual
new
formations.
1.
We can consider the dominant chord as a major triad with added minor seventh, and consequently can change every triad into a dominant chord. Here
270.
^,
-&-&-
=g=fe=^-'&Z13Z
:t|
fo-
we have
its tonic,
a passage
But
a triad,
since every
itself
already
we can
dom
=^
271.
ds
_2I
:te
:fe --^
z\S2Z
&-
JZ.
3SZ.
'-bzsn
-y&-fe-
190
T=^=^^ES^f^:^2~=^.
Here we
the seventh of the following chord.*
for five voices, in
#fi=*=#=,^
-&-
gg~
2.
drives us from dominant chord to dominant from one key to another, in rapid progress, but without unity of key. Strictly speaking, it is nothing but the foreign tones which occur at every new chord, which destroy this
Let us attempt, then, to retain the passage, at the same time voluntarily rejecting the foreign tones, by omitting the acunity.
cidentals.
* The above resiilts of the analogous development of the harmonic ment are already indicated in the natural development of the tonic
ment.
ele-
ele-
Already (page 75) we noticed that after the first six tones which nature had given us, and which stood in the simplest relations to each other,
(1, 2, 3, 4, 5,)
for instance,
',
e g,
c,
7,
g,
a seventh tone made its appearance, for which then after which only, the other tones,
c,
we had no
name,
an(J
a,
e,
<Sco.,
made
6, 7,), though lower than our 6b, an must and can serve us as 61;. that the second harmonic mass, or the dominant chor-l g-h-drf, has a predisposition to resolve into the first harmonic mass, or the tonic triad, c-e-g. But in the same instant, by means of the just mentioned ib, the chord becomes anew a dominant chord, (c-e-j'-Jb,) which resolves into a new tonic, (F-c-a.) Thus the nature of the tonic element strives of itself downwards, in the same manner as we have illustrated it in No. 271.
I
higher than
Now we know
191
1227
272.
.._-J-_i_-J_iJJ_
^F^ ^m
we
also discover
No. No.
and
third,
and
minor seventh.
4,
a chord which at a
were the
case, it
into
c-e-ff,note-g!lj-b,
or e-g^-b-d.
it is
progression, as
appears in
No.
2,
and
3,
third,
major
fifth,
and ma^
and
third,
Aajor
fifth,
theii
3.
ff*'
SUCCESSION
NACHORDS ONLY.
According to the above,
nonachords
also, instead
it
dominant chords.
273.
192
11
i^--^.
274.
^
The
latter
tice.
bp:
z^trtfa
F=t=^
is left for
4.
In the
same manner
we
I
m
275.
--i=l=l
--^fr^--
3E^^
Amidst two
Nos. 2 and
familiar nonachords, Nos. 1
and 8 we
find here
of major intervals.
^ ^
and
No.
4, exclusively
5,
of minor
third,
intervals.
fifth,
No.
ninth.
with minor
major
Nos. 6 and
ninth.
7,
fifth
like unaltered
They
are treated
successions,
we can
develops
193
276.
the passage
from
277.
^E^dfe ^m
is
which, however, as
easily to
How
how
to carry
them
is left
to the student's
own indus-
But
the
let
all
many
them with
so
many new
chords have
* Here, at last, we have an opportunity to introduce an appendix to the passages discovered. (Page 119.) Then, particularly in Mbs. 134 and 136 we took the step into the dominant as basis ; now we take the step into the subdominant as design. Here,
278.
and
here, reversedly,
&
279.
S>-)g-
is::ai
r
fetEzgx
:pi^=ft
i^:g=: -4-p-
r ri-p
But is it proper at .\, b, c, carried the design straight through. and D, to deviate from the rules of the dominant chord and the dominant triad! to omit the resolution of /J-a-o into g-b-d? to have the seventh c ascend to d! to double the third, or to lead it now above, then below ? These deviations, too, like those in No. 271, and similar ones formerly mentioned, are hidden and justified by the analogy and the firm progression At a and b the actual resolution-chord occurs merely of the whole passage. and we shall soon learn that this, is tl e later and in a diflterent position
we have
case too at c
and
D.
194
e.
of taking
b\,
as at a,
we have
taken Sb at once, as at
b.
280.
^^
^C2.
-33:
and we have again an illustration of the infinity of that tonical development in which every step hrings us a new series of formaConsidering again that so many septime and nonachords, tions.
together with the diminished triad, obey
A SINGLE LAW,
indicated in the second harmonic the scale,
which, though given only with the dominant chord, was already mass and the second position of
we
We
dominant chord
which
it
it
nachords and
all the
derived chords
then,
;
appendix from one key into the other nouncing the return into
its tonic, its
once
;
re-
motion
it,
is
unbounded
for
neither rest nor end, but drives us incessaptly through all the
we
mony.
Equally just
is
AS SEAT OF REPOSE.
They
They,
by
itself,
duce no
sages
;
new
their
or
most
voices), not
19S
harmonically connected
;
for
mon with
Now,
we
name
DOMINANT.
The tone
and tone-motion;
modulations turn.
The greatest motion of the triad we can oppose to it and harmony would be a succession of sext chords, diatonic as No. 167, or chromatic, as here
its
in
281.
But
moThe chord
move
into or towards
The separate
voices only
move
diatonically
or chromatically
lar
up and down ; but exactly because of the reguthis is done, the chords
manner
in
which
196
CHAPTER
IV.
VARIABLE MODULATIOirS.*
By
we
this
name we
means of modulation as
can lead into more than one key, according to the view which
take of their relation.
We
ticularly to
two
chords.
A.
chord.
it is
Of
cause
this
chord
we
the clear-
est designation of a
it
shall speak
now,
this
we
just designated a
means of variable
chord, as
and
f-ah.
When we
inverted tone,
b is
we have
ab-cl>
again a
and
instead of b ;
consequently a
by the
name of one
contents.
tone, but
by no means
it
And since
this
like
2.
That the inversions of the diminished septime chords sound a fundamental chord.
in its tones
dif-
(J.
197
The
first
arrive in a
new
282.
key.
Here, at
a,
],
Dh
or
Cjj
we At
b-d-f-a},,
leading to
d-f-a\)-h,
minor.
en-
we
by the
(ci^ab-cb),
The
chord of the
minor.
But
we change
in
F% minor. At d we
f,
change the
g\-h-d-f,
again into
which leads
us to
A minor.
since neither
Now,
we can
represent the
same
results at
once, thus
I
IlJ
J"
I
283.
and every
position,
The industrious
fourth one,
To
we
will
now add a
(the
minor ninth
would
fall
tave."
198
the descension of the seventh, be changed into a dominant chord,
(or rather a quint-sext chord of the same), for instance
in h-d-f-g.
b-drf-a)}
results
just so
much from
is
the case
when we
This
otlftrs
a half-step.
to D\), E, Q,
and
B\)
major or minor.
three tones
of the chord;
we
now attempt
it
with
all
&e.
286.
^ i "^
it
iffi^E2^
%
it
i^
we meet
-^
:fe
:^MP^-
leaving
tions.
Here, be
observed,
ac-
With every
this
step
were the
case, the
(once according to No. 286, and again as in No. 284), the other tones would follow as in No. 286.
Let us do
step,
new modulations
D, F, and
A),
major or minor.
199
Of course
direction
;
the
one tone
step.
may
ascend
a half-step while
others
as-
cend a whole
288.
i^^^
four
new modulations
to
it
B, F,
A\),
and G,
per-
out in other,
Thus the simple diminished septime chord leads us immediby means of an assistant chord into all twelve major or minor keys, and to most of them in more than one way.
ately, or
B.
The dominant
chord.
Already in Nos. 154, 155, and 188, our third and seventh of the dominant chord have risked, under cover of the remaining voices, some deviating steps ; at No. 271 we have arbitrarily changed
the resolution of the third, and thus have arrived at a
inant chord, and consequently at a
inant).
new domsubdom-
new key
(that of the
Let us now pursue the opposite. one dominant chord into another, vis.
^S;. _2_
We
;
-59289,
li^
fro^-.
The third pursued here its natural course, but the seventh was elevated, and the fifth and fundamental tone have also pursued a different course. This proceeding is based more upon our pleasure than any law of nature, and is only admissible because
of the near relation of key.
of the same (as at b)
It is
is applicable.
But we
200
291.
At A
as
if it
/
of
goes properly to
e,
6 to
c,
d
the
to c or e ;
a,
it
seems
in-
were going to be
the
tonic
triad,
c-e-g.
But g goes to
triad
and
instead
us,
tiial c,
we have
of a before
ac-
which,
perhaps, remains
major-,
perhaps causes an
modulation to
resolve the
A
or
minor.
In the
same manner
c-e])-a\)
at b
and
we
or
a,
instead
of
c-e])-g.
We might
c-e-g,
as omissions of
as illustrated
comprehended
here.
-&292.
-iS^
E
.a.
:iES^^=g= ^g=~
s-e-
m.
^^ -&
swhile the
it
At A
another
chord, until finally in the last chord the seventh obtains its due.
At B we
we merely go
to
e,
to the
subdominant of
far
C minor.
into the
At
c,
pursue
natural course
but goes
beyond
fundamental tone.
it.
By
this
means we
(k)*
* See Appendix H.
201
CHAPTEE
V.
more
firm and
more
ex-
we
Though
more
we will
ing
The harmonies of one single key permitted us in reality nothmore than to form a period of thesis and anti-thesis and coda
In the duophonic composition
or codas.
we
but
and
anti-thesis to a first
was only rhythmiin tonical respect it was by no means so well end we had merely the half cadence on the
first
The
part
But
this
dominant which reminded us of the key of the dominant and served as close of the thesis. There remains now for us but one
step
;
we
Thus
anticipating,
we have
No. 257, closed the thesis with a modulation into the dominant but the close was rhythmically imperfect.
already, in
;
The
cadence
but
this
;
cadence
it
still
does not
satisfactorily,
202
The
first is
the second
It is therefore
again the
fundamental form ot page 81, though carried out with higher and
richer means.
The above
est,
is
a composition in
C major
will
end in
major.
the near-
and
suificient
until larger
and
freer
formations
lead
us
further.
In minor,
this
;
gloom
is
to
gloom
minor
triad, as
we have
seen already,
it
were,
by
That which characterises the triad is characteristic of the key also. Nor is the minor key so intimately connected with its dominant as the major key. major, the For instance, in
dominant triad g-b-d indicates at once the key of G major. Not so with minor ; for the actual triad of the dominant in minor, (for instance in A minor -5'|-S) by no means indicates the minor
,
mode
of the dominant.
minor mode of the dominant, but prefers to go into the nearest-related major key for instance, from A minor to C major. This is the regular progression of the modulation, which we
;
from this rule. Our first construction in two parts would therefore be represented in the following sketches For major
justify us in deviating
gd-
293,
$
-igfor
e-&~P-
S p1
-s-s?
^^E
and
f^
^-
S-&-
f
minor-
203
294.
rw
tp=^y
-p-
_ss_
$
The two
sures each
;
SSSl i:
the
first is
second
we know
The
to
sis
harmony begins here the first part: it is needless repeat that we might also commence with another. The thetonic
of the
first part,
After that
we
move towards
a higher
to end.
But
uous elevation
of the
one-sided
point.
a continIt is true
i.
e.
But the second part is to a degree separated from the first. Thus the character of the first part disagrees with the meaning of a close, which ought to be quieting and soothing.
beginning.
How
the
first
can
we now
unite these
two
essentials
?
the
elevation of
into
movement
led
But
we
cannot alter the close, without falling back upon the principal
tone.
ment of the
We lead the
from
movement
BEYOND
ITS
ACTUAL GOAL,
C major, for instance, to Z* major; aud now we can fall upon the actually wanted key of the dominant, and have thus
204
united elevation and depression, and gain a perfectly quieting,
soothing close.
same proceeding should be applied in minor, the modulamust first be led into the dominant of the parallel key, and finally into the latter ; in A minor, for instance, fij-st to G major and then to Cmajor. But this impulse seems here to be less forcible for the felevation in minor rests less upon the elevation into a higher key, than upon the transition into the clearer and more
If the
tion
vigorous major.
In the second part, also,
end.
The second
But
it
would be betfall
it
and
decision.
upon
we
an
pal tone.
in major,
205
the dominant, or with the parallel key, as the nearest and
most
appropriate steps.
Afterwards
we
we were
;
to go
still
further,
we would
related keys
can choose more distant keys without touching upon the nearer
are
will
we
shall
The unity of our well-rounded phrases would be destroyed by too great an abundance of modulation
extended modulations.
into distant keys.
But
if it is
vagueness,
we have but
phrase, with or
without alteration.
By
such a proceeding
we
not only
gain
more
digressive modulation
it
is less
objectionable,
is
because whatever in
leads
principal tone,
made harmless by
makes the
D.
The interrupted
cadence.
Formerly we had
connection than
to,
no other means of
represent the
ending imperfectly.
Now,
new means
to avoid
the actual close in the principal tone, and to introduce the coda,
purpose
we end with a full and perfect cadence. For we make use of one or the other of the free resoluThus, for instance, after a
full prec.
tions of the
dominant chord.
paration of a close in
297.
^
it
206
-^=$=f=^^^
'P-'Pto the triad of
we could go
bring with
or ^b, or to any chord which would know a coda, and finally a principal cadence.
We
we
eflfected by renewed avoidance of Such preventive cadences are called " Interrup-
ted cadences."
The imperfect
we have
for-
207
CHAPTER
VI.
ABEUPT MODXILATION.
The
thus
diflerent
far,
But
present
is
to
new
formations as
can easily
now we have
more or
effected our
By the
until then
was the
of modulation
less
transitive chord
From
the above
we
when a phrase
ends, as
it
can,
without
298.
M
1
^
G
which ends in
major.
One
;
some
in other wordSj
new
phrase, or perhaps a
mer harmonic
relation, can
now become
a fundamental tone,
208
third, fifth, seventh,
nachord
in
which
Ab
it
inherent,
299
Bb
or
or
.B.
At No. 298 we
also
but we could
in the
and applied
it
same
manner.
less
;
no new key.
But
since
we
we
require no transition
become fimdamental
a
a
E\)
new
tonic triad, in
new
key.
G minor
E minor
i
O minor
--^
:&
5 major
5 minor
Git
lis=F4 ILB\>
^e-
E
In all these cases,
it is
%W
-s-
This gives us again twelve modulations (not counting the repetitions of those already counted) into
major or minor.
true, the
But we have depended more on was closed, and that the harthe harmony.
mony had
ceased.
We will now in reality depart for a time from We will change No. 298 into the following,
301.
>-a-
"Jtl t-^
209
and
after the perfect, ending of the harmony we continue^ in a monophonic or octaye passage up to. any particular tone, in this case it would perhaps.be/. This/ can again be part of a domi-
two; and
thus, we could
303.
B\,
E\,
A\,
Or
the
same tone.can
J*"
at,
new tonic
triad,
major
J minor
ii
Vt major
jyxaxaax
303.
i
we
^
I2I
%%.
among
we have
And
bound to attach our new phrase to the tone/ since we can stop at any tone of our tone-system, it is evident that there exists no key which could not in this manner be attached to the preceding one. But all these harmonies and keys, at which we arrived in Nos. 300 and 302, have not the
are not absolutely
slightest
g-h-d.
They are
by
this
resigning the harmonic connection, and they are connected with what preceded by the mere thin thread of the melody. At last we have arrived at the point where we can resign even this last connecting link, and enter a foreign key without any
mediation..
Here
is
an
illustration.
The second measure closes in C. The cadence is full and perfect And immethe rhythm only leads us to expect a continuation.
diately
we
continue,
By
210
-what right
it
?
Because
by
itself,
as
were ; a new piece which takes up the thread of the previous phrase at a different place, and perhaps in a different sense. And
it is
sidered as a
at
new phrase,
that
we
consider the
new chord
JE}}
H\)-g-b\f
is
only
indilater.
we should
continue thus
305,
feE $ fT^
h-^f^
and turned to
211
CHAPTER
VII.
we retain
it
at once,
though
its full
imIt
which combine several phrases in various keys into one is a continuation of the fifth chapter, in which we men-
At
The
or
nant or parallel was the means and sign of the close of a part.
seizing
and combining of various keys gams additional imseveral phrases are to be connected in one piece,
portance,
when
when
In such
At
time the field fOr a new phrase, and influences its relative keys. first appears the actual principal key, and demands room for
If the association
development.
necessary
is
absolutely
we must
preceded by
itself,
;
its
dominant.
Its
subdominant
is
the princi-
pal
key
at the here.
end
Therefore, if
we must extend
our modulation
its
we
shall
nearest re-
The third
An extension of modwould lead us to its parallel for, its dominant would be the principal key, which must follow soon after under any circumstances, and its subdominant would lead us off
nant, which prepares (page 200) the close.
too
far,
And now
allel
212
We
allel
latter,
because
we
comprehended as belonging to the latter. But this analogical powould place a new key where we want it least where the elevation from the subdominant to the principal key is of imporAnd this must decide us to have the subdominant precetance.
sition
;
ded by
its parallel.
The
far
close, of course, is
is
made
There
we have
It
forgotten thus
the
it
it
would be proper to
attach
close
At
Its
either
place
would stand
in the
way of proper
elevation.
best po;
we
be where all the parallel keys meet here mass of minor modulations which, by the intervention of the principal parallel, becomes first duly organised. As a summary of all the above we give now a diagram for the
find a
Major.
Cmajor, JD major,
Minor.
Major.
i*"
G major,
jF minor,
A minor, 3 minor,
major, Cmajor.
Everywhere we have' an analogical progression, sufficient connection, and, in the combination of major and minor, a simple and vigorous distribution of masses. Were we tobreak up these major and minor masses, and intersperse them at random, none of the keys would achieve its full efficacy, and the modulation would become unstable and restless.
gloomy and undecided character of the minor keys (page 202.) The cause of this lies in the fact, that, immediately after the principal key, the second sphere is occupied by a key of a different mode. To this parallel key we could attach the dominant, (or
rather the parallel of the principal key's dominant) and afterwards
key itself. Then the key of the subdominant and its parallel would naturally follow, and we would have the following diagram
:
A minor,
in
major,
major,
which we perceive
213
nant
this
(at f ) does
not attach
itself as
key, or
by omitting
other ways.
Uach
once.
It
key,
follows from the whole tendency of our work, that these or-
by no means
The
will
vantage.
If
we
deviate, therefore,
position,
If,
any key a
first
different
we must
for instance,
we
concluded to end a
afterwards,
though the dominant would find a position at some other place. The following order would perhaps come into existence
:
C major, A minor, D
minor,
is
modulation.
at
any
place.
let
But
us consider
we have
achieved
now from a different point of view what by our order of modulation. Not merely the
fills
an important
anti-thesis
first,
and the
of the
it
first
were,
is
second part,
&c.
as
is
fixed.
PASSAGES OP PHRASES.
In reality. No. 266
is
it
consists not
No. 270), of a series of well connected single chords, but of two and two harmonies the dominant chord
like others, (for instance,
:
triad.
In like
manner each
phrase,
by
repeti-
214
tioii
on
306.
we have
of four chords.
Thus we have
here
307.
^^m^
sign,
i^i_4ifMJ:
a passage before us, the phrase of which originated from the de-
No. 306
A,
third.
But
even here we
(No. 306
The phrases and only the repetition made them a more significant whole. The phrase in No. 307, however, is in itself more rounded and satisfactory the first repetition makes it moie vigorous, and accidentally represents it in minor ; the second repetition will already be conthemselves, do not require a frequent repetition.
A and
b),
were
insignificant in themselves,
it
anew,
we have
placed
it
in a higher octave.
It is
formed of more extended phrases, are apt to get too broad and
expanded.
215
CHAPTER
VIII.
THE PEDAL-POINT.
modulations
scale against
the
first
har-
we now find a similar succor for the principal tone. Where is, in reality, the beginning and origin of all motion ? we have perceived this in our deIt is in the dominant chord
necessary that
;
it
(page 194).
But the dominant is not merely the basis of the dominant chord, the nonachords and the derived septime chords, but it is also the fundamental tone of that triad which we consider at one time as a harmony of the principal key, at another time as a tonic harmony it can be fifth of the tonic triad of the principal key, or the basis
of a quarUsext chord.
chords
:
It
308.
fiirnish
much more
key,
nant chord, however long continued. But we must proceed. The dominant chord itself is nothing but an issue from the
tonic (page 76)
resting
upon a tone of
to
its
harmony.
At page
91
we have
already learned
216
309.
$
new
tonic,
But
since
we
it
can con-
new
tonic,
a domi-
nant chord.
310.
Only now the dominant has reaUy become a tonic, and we can combine it in this capacity, and in its original capacity {g as tonic of Gf major, and ff as dominant of C major,) in the following harmonic formation
311.
suc-
312.
in
The tonic triad as quartext chord, The dominant chord of the principal key. The dominant triad as harmony of the principal key. The dominant triad as tonic harmony of another key
have been combined.
the dominant,
But we have seen already in our order of construction, how when it becomes the tonic of a new key, (page 163) brings with it the key of its own dominant ; and having just now considered the dominant G, as a new key, we can open
the
way
for its
dominant.
217
313.
drawn into the whirlpool of the dominant chord, and ascending and descending
And
=:
r-
314.
passages which are a condensed recapitulation of the whole modulation are built
into the tonic
upon the single dominant, and harmony of the principal key.* Such chain of harmony is called a
PEDAlj-POINT,
and
is
means to make a
decisive
and vigor-
While
cipal tone, the sustained bass serves to connect the chords built
upon it. Thus we see in the pedal-point, in two respects, one of the most energetic tone formations ; firstly as the basis of a wellclosed series of chords, working towards a certain aim, and sec-
ondly as the connecting link and support of these chords. It is exactly for this, tha,t the pedal point is only then in
right place,
its
when
it is
mind and for the tones. But as every dominant can stand as tonic, every
as dominant'; consequently
the tonic.
we can
* can we explain the chord a-ci-e-g in No. 314? By, itself, alone, it certainly does not agree with the pedal tone ji; we can, therefore, only speak of its position in the above modulation. have considered the first chord as the tonic of <? major; consequently {d) was near at hand, and for this the "modulation into the dominant of we have introduced the chor,d a-c'^-e-g. This chord had necessarily to rehave selected the latter, the g in the bass solve into drf\-a, or d-f-a. still remaihihg,iknd thus the chord g-Ti-d-f-a was naturally presented to us.
How
We
&
We
218
315.
BE
ISl
flre
fullest
In the above
we have
called
Thus the
We
can
It is, firstly,
series of analogically
it is,
secondly,
an inde-
is
an essential of the
219
chords while at another time
itself) it is
it is
not.
Since,
when standing by
an independent voice, we can also double it by means of octaves, without regard to the web of the other voices.
316.:
whole movement.
And thus is the inversion of a pedal-point also fully justified. By inversion we mean here that combination in which the original
fundamental tone resigns
place of a middle voice,
I
its
ItJ
I'hJ
|_ q-
g'.
m tPr'S-^-
318
in every
form to more or
scale can take
become the
basis of a
Below
will be found a
be
320.
* See Appendix G.
220
CHAPTER
IX.
RETKOSPEOTION.
A.
Devehpmenf of Harmjony,
The two
lished.
tone-species
and
their scales
basis,
The melody has been developed upon a diatonic and harmonic by means of rhythm and the first principles of musical conin-
struction.
But most important of all is the development of the chords, it was effected by the triple structure itself, or by such alterations of degrees as were originated by modulation. This development of harmony led us to modulation into foreign keys.
as far as
The two together engaged us so much that the melodic element, the guidance of voices, had to become subordinate and also the further development of rhythm and construction had to be
;
neglected.
Let us
now
Our rapidly increasing richness has furnished us with innumerable means and ways for the most manifold objects. We should not like to lose any part of them. But the power of our first formations the meaning and importance of each exist still.
None
is
harmony,
321. f)--
gz
which
is
modeTof proportion
221
fifth
The depression of its third has given us the minor triad. Its was the basis of the dominant chord with all its variations
and descendants.
And
thus, gradually,
have
we been ied
to the
modulation into foreign keys, and have gained means for more
extensive compositions.
It
remains
now
on paper as well as
far.
Having arrived at this point of harmonic development, we must look back once more and consider the relation of voices in
their progressions
We
At
the
same
time, hovvever,
we have
In
we must
first
ascertain
what such
It is not enough Such principles would degrade music to a mere slave of the senses, while it would prevent mind and soul from taking any but the most superficial interest in it.
to say they
If the progression is
idea
then,
must be interpreted
that
This proves,
consecutive
effect,
octaves
or
fifths,
able in their
another.
can be right at
employed
alreiady
we must
such
therefore,
as
we have
know what
momentary
parallelism of voices in
general expresses.
This
is
It is sufiieient
for us to
know
M^ Ff
222
are considered as a
for the
same reason
For the s*me reason are the parallel progressions in sixths or thirds (as we find them often in duetts) so well calculated to
cement the unity of voices.
In polyphonic phrases, too, these parallel progressions preserve
Thus we perceive
^
two upper voices seem to lean on each other, as if they were determined to be reckoned as but one. Therefore all paralthat the
lel
by themselves would be offensive. Thus are the following progressions justified by the parallel directions of two or more of the
voices,
I
Kl
-^ -r-frrTT
But
this unity
fl
On
the contrary,
and similarity cannot always be welcome to us. we would probably prefer, particularly in the
is
Besides
this,
For
this reason
have
rule, that
Thus much of the parallelism of voices in general. We have to consider the effect of two voices, according to the intervals in which they progress. The first of these are
now
the
Octave Parallels,
of which everything most necessary has been said, (page 101, ex-
ample No.
93.)
223
We
duplications or
but that
it
mere reinforcement, as it were, are admissible was quite a different affair when the octaives were
;
formed by such
were
ev-
Thus,
its
be-
or ia other words
made
11
1221
FtF
I I .
=p~i
r~
is
'
r^^r^
'^
taves throughout.
The one
is
both in reality form but one voice or melody, and answer their purpose full well if it was the composer's object to obtain a broadness of volume which could not be effected
ciation of a single voice.
by mere
to
stronger enun-
From
we
turn
now
of which, too,
we have spoken
Two
and
select ot
Major
Fifths.
We remember
the
fifth,
that in No.
54 the
fifth
was the
first
new
tone
and
;
g,
was the
triad,
first
dawn of harmony
c-g
uncompleted
and
e.
Without
teristic
entering
charac-
of this interval,
we
it
represents
^134,
fifths
two
triads, the
manner of the
other.
$ ^
in
repetition,
321
-&-
still
more,
so,
when
its
for
instance,
why
(like those at
a and
b), are
more conspicuous
and'
more
disagree(c, d,)
when
by a
pause, or
Even
the contrary
mo-
?t.
^ai.
ti-
Ete^
^
3
when the
a and dg
d and g
notes
c.
225
An
by means of
^
rests,
Jinatead of
=lzE_lir=4:g:
f
it
f-
interrupts or hides
harmony.
Intermediate tones,
P0
fifths fall
:
iL-i.J-J
i^f^^P^
i
J-
)f
Another
liind
of mitigation
is when the other voices insure us by the fifths, but others, well con-
sures
A and B of the
following.
^
r
is
It
T
I
considerably softened
thus
^^
f
Still less
*\-^-'
li-
?2Z
.01
-iB-
226
by a flowing progression of
two
fifths
^ i rj
This,
-*Ti
we
has set our theorists at loggerheads, and has caused the most contradictory rules.
its
We
good reason, and that we are always able to avoid consecutive fifths, if we wish to. But we must always remember, that an abstract rule can spread much mischief, and that quint-successions are not only sometimes admissible, but actually the only righ1!
way of
expression.
We shall,
But
avoiding of fifths.
fifths at
this shall
a later moment,
sion in view.
(a),
FIFTHS,
i.
e.
fifths, (c)
are not
included
M:
n
from the very
fact that
fifth results in
U
i"
I
"I
in the prohibition,
minor
fifths
do not dessucceeds a
when a major
fifth
The inversion of a
a fourth.
It is
a natural con-
somewhat
in
It is
true
we have
often
made use
voices.
227
Successions of sevenths and seconds can only occur
when one
for instance
Pis^
Successions of thirds and sixths are the most unobjectionable. But we must warn against a too frequent and too long use of
A succession
of major thirds, as
we have had
it
in
our har-
scale,
ESE^ i
-iS-
-Sh
by former
theorists
and
it
is
something harsh in
this succession.
But if the chords are otherwise well-connected, this harshness becomes much less perceptible, and often, too, such harshness can be the very representative of an
In short,
artistic idea.
we
will
which makes us hesitate at every full and vigorous expression, and which always deceives itself, because the anxious listening to
every strange tone or chord leads us to suspect something wrong
or bad, which in reality does not exist.
228
Eigrhth Fart.
Displacement of Chords.
CHAPTEK
I.
However
is
richly our
still
far
developed,
there remains
Every
The consequence
we had
One voice was chained to the other, and when one entered new harmony, the others were sure to follow. It is clear that the invention of new hatmonies does not remedy for each of these new chords must again be constructed this evil But we must take a different view of the harof three tones. monic element we must look upon it as a combination of difa
;
ferent voices.
From
this point of
view
we
our
zssz
322.se
g goes to
/, all
first
it
upon an
and thus
now our
229
shall not progress simultaneously. shall not progress
The upper
-J_;
323.
'-i-
-&-
third,
and
fifth
to the
same
and must,
there-
chord
existence in
the
chord
in the second.
it
SUSPENSION.*
itself teaches
us
when such
admissible.
must be prepared ;
i. e.,
the discrepant
tone must exist in the preceding chord, and must be given to the
same voice which forms the suspension. Secondly, the suspension must be resolved ; i. e., the discrepancy between it and the chord must cease, the suspending voice must finally enter upon the proper tone of the chord.
Yet the discrepancy between suspension and chord is not justified; in spite of preparation and resolution, we still hear a
strange tone instead of the proper tone of the chord.
Strictly
by
it.
There-
order not to
make
it
too harsh,
it
is
for instance,
we were
thus:
* See Appendix
230
Jr^
324.
W -f=^
TT
m
22=
ei^
ultaneously with
its
^^
the octave of the fundamental tone (in the second chord) -would
be suspended, while the same interval would be introduced simsuspension, in the upper voice.
In the
fifth
same
e
of the
d,
greater,
'''$
^-^=^=4=^
2221
r
and octave.
^^-
r
interfering
where we can
Where, now, can suspensions be employed? Everywhere and with observation fulfil the above conditions
;
of these conditions
1,
in every voice.
2, in
3, for
every chord.
we
shall call
This suspension-tone
is
Consequently every tone of a chord which descends a degree, can be employed for such a suspension.
Let us attempt
the upper voice.
this in
our descending
scale,
and
at first with
231
326.
^J-J
t:
-e-
-^
W\\usi
:
I
will introduce all the suspensions possible with
And now we
these chords.
327.
^U-
^
QE
:23i
^-FS
SI-
-s'-
p^r^f
J-
descends a degree.
The bass could nowhere become a suspension, because it nowhere For the same reason the alto had to wait
We perceive
into existence
as, for
by
chord, while
we
chord or triad of
It is
we
consider
sufficient that
call
them
into existence
whenever we
But there are other suspensions which, though resembling still treated very differently. Thus we might consider the first tone-mass of the fifth measure as an incomplete
former chords, are
nonachord,
f-a-c,
c-e-g-h-d.
But
in that case
c-e-g.
it
way
nay,
it is
an actual advantage,
for it
to consider this
mass
The introduction of
because
all
suspensions, thus
far,
gave us no trouble,
all
appropriate for
is it
But how
with
as-
cending successions
232
328.
ki
sr
look upon the contents of the chords, suspenIn the second chord is
6,
But
if
we merely
c.
which might
be suspended by
fortunately
it is
in the treble,
In the
e?,
same manner we might suspend the but the d is again in another voice.
Here, as formerly in No. 95,
we
give the
voice.
The
rf,
alto,
Leading
this h again
up
to d,
we
make
1.
is:.
3F
329.
2.
s.mm.
is
^^^lJlij^Md: f
fe-
Here, now,
is
the ascend-
mamier, with
all its
suspen-
330.
i m
0-
P Ps-\
-022r
&-
f^VfT
-e-
221
f
221
BE -Ai
The
If,
;A-^-i
P2was able
1-^
sr
in this succession to
alto, alone,
form suspensions-
we had changed
a domi-
233
nant chord, the tenor would have had opportunity to form a suspension.
1:
331.
BE
In the penultimate measure, too, the tenor could have
suspension, if the b
made
was not already in the upper voice. What have we now gained by these suspensions 1
First of
all,
indicate
them by
many new harmonic formations. If we wish to figures, we must write the suspension and the
The above
succession
would then be
marked thus
rt^
r
234
It is
now
necessary, above
all,
we know now.
Every ex
It
we have had
finally
B, (2),
or
may
first
will
be advisable to treat
this
manhere.
all
togethei'.
As an example we
all
give
the voices,
335.
j-^gi
.r-i
m f^
J-
z3tji=Mziz
^.^
-TjJr
BE
=^
extensive our means,
like to be,
fZ:
we
as
and
wherever
another.
we could and
by no means as free as we should we had to introduce the suspensions many as we could, without having it in
in
com-
mand
Suspension of Fundamental
tones.
The suspensions of the fundamental tone of a chord in the bass seem so harsh, that we must enquire whether it is at all admissible to make use of them. The suspension of the fundamental tone in the bass shakes, as it were, the
upon
it.
Nor does
the bass at
all
require
which
is
The bass
prefers de-
when
235
But
in this
very consideration
lies
above question.
just the thing.
When we
Or,
if in
I^
li
C| minor
Sonata,
335.
^^B
^^331^
KB.
IT"
m^
it
gEE^=i^=?:
to retreat before a
g=
would be cowardly
bination.*
* See Appendix
J.
236
CHAPTER
SUSPENSIOK-S
II.
FROM BELOW.
We only
acted arbitrarily
It
when we attached our suspensions to was not in this that the nature of the
it
suspension lay, but merely in the fact that a tone of one chord
stretched over into another to which
'
But
pension-tone
lower,
Here
336.
we see the b of the first and third chords resolve into the higher c ; and again we see the h and d of the penultimate chord resolve These are the suspensions which, in into the higher c and e.
contradistinction to our former ones,
below.
scale,
we call suspensions from They require no further explanation. The ascending with employment of these suspensions would present an
387.
The necessary
ciples.
figuring
known prin-
we
237
i^
338.
238
DISPLACEMENT OF CHORDS.
Formerly we have looked upon the suspensions in a literally melodic point of view, as the most important, and have accidentally acquired
reconnoitre
we
can see
some new harmonic formations. Now that we can them fully, and observe their effects upon the harmony, in them
the strongest
most general connection which chords have on account of their intervals belonging to one and the same scale, there were two means of bringing them in a harmonic relation to
each other.
Firstly, the mutual tones.
are actually the
Next to
But as
far as
we have
chord.
seen, they
most
ineffective in the
new
For, on ac-
count of their having been in the previous chord, they are less
conspicuous than the
new
tones.
sub-species,
The
;
but since
it
new
The
decided progression
but in consequence of
disagreement
new chord
as far as
we can judge
at present
from
this progression
poned
the resolution
in existence.
Thus,
by means
of suspensions,
we
us.
and in
this capa-
be of vast service to
In the course of our instruction we have only spoken of what was absolutely necessary for the occupation of the student we have not even drawn attention to the fact, that the tone of a melody need no longer be considered as an independent tone of the
;
it
sus-
239
pension. But now, that we have done justice to the nearest and most practical object of our instruction, we must not fail to draw thelattention of the student to some peculiarities. The resolution of the suspension was necessary, in order to explain and justify the discrepancy
the
new
chord.
But
more
chord-
Thus, here
at A, the suspended e reaches correctly into d, but not before the third of the
olution.
new chord found its way between suspension and resAt B, in the above, we find even three tones between
Beethoven, in his Sonata
farther.
A t^^i=H i
-fi
@W
-a-c|
;
^^^^Ih&^
The
first
the suc-
e-g\-b-d, in
which
chord
is
retained,
first
^ff.
But
J,
and
finally to
^^f.
If
it
were at
new formation to fundamental forms, we might easily explain above by imagining the chord /|-(i-c|-e, but the explanation
that/jt
is
of
the suspension
of the
and
and nonachords.
In regard to their
240
preparation
we must remember
new
one.
mitted that
it
This was in fact, its resolution, and we adhad to take place in the same voice preparation^
;
ii
freer formations.
Here
iE^^^^m^^^. m ~^'
BE
at A,
first
^ ^
z
c ; it
we
was
in
the
?ame
The
same
octave," but in a
lower one.
first
At
c-e-ff.
the chord
It is easily
seen that in
all
We
;
cannot
but
we
must admit that there is something estranging m them. And, finally, we might allow a suspension without any preparation.
-^
'ff
F=F
m^
ff
II
'
y^
c^"
jr~s
BE
2?".
r
;
we aimed at all at a decisive, startling combination of tones. These unprepared suspensions might serve also for a milder,
if
anxious expression
for instance,
341
P
writing
it.
w
Phrases like the following,
^
1^0 ^^
-
-zsa
w
manner of
J^^^^P^
1=
written thus
O^^g ^^s-
E=^
^i=:
-G-
221
J2-S.
3
Here, however,
ought to take place while the chord into which the suspension
its
has found
way
is still in
existence.
-&-
y=^
-19i
-^-
W-
Y
e
P
The /of
and in
e-e-^r,
different chord.
of the chord'
and g-h-d have changed into- cb-c-e and that the resolution is effected on the proper
it.
It is
The
still
We know already
ft5.)
1,
in succession, as
242
long as either of them, particjilarly the supensioiif obtains its
due.
b, c,
and
d,
is
correctly re-
but immediately
after
the resolution
This cor-
it
we
will here
P E
/
ty^ * ^^ i
-^-:
Jtt
243
contented with the
still
in another voice.
But
this
very defect
still
more, and to
make
In the above
it is
make
^^
Here we
pension.
see
g--g--
^?#
-^V-fi-
m.
m
another voice can serve in a degree as the
deviation from the
first
agdn a
We
-'(2-
i
BE
The
ate
it.
1 "^
-e-
-&-
jG^Tn
^^^
^
does not obvi-
=F=f=
Z2=
it
Finally
logically
arises ana-
we
the
The g of the treble remains same manner does the b remain with
Were we
g would
resolve into
a,
and
244
that of b retarded
by two
intermediate tones.
these suspensions
i
I
would be nothing but octaves of another voice dragging after it, and suspension-tone and suspended tone would meet in the same
moment.
possible.
is
absolutely im-
upon these
over them.
to
when given
effect.
able
and quint-successions.
Let us glance
first
at
Here
at a,
we
it
less objectionable
following succession
17"
I
I
i PT'if^
if
245
sions at b, soften it to such a degree that
we need not
hesitate to
employ
it.
It is different
with
may
make
the evil
Thus
if here.
those at b, on account of
still
more
so.
246
CHAPTER m.
ANTICIPATION (ANTICIPATED TONES).
What made
The
and
fact
it
words,
in
and
/ To attempt the
which
it
now
disagrees.
But the
tone has not remained from a former chord, but has been antici-
341,
m
d appears
% i^
-^
in like
m
is
total contradiction to
its
appearance.
effect
have to consider well, therefore, if the introduction of such effects corresponds with the object we have in
view.
We
Sometimes
voices,
it
is
following
its
own
course,
247
upon the tone e, which belongs to the succeeding chord, c-e-gi, instead of the dominant chord which accompanies it. Sometimes the anticipated tone is merely intended to add rhythmical vigor to the succeeding one, and cannot be considered
as belonging to the chord in which
ancient cadences,
it
appears.
Thus, in the
343.
~i\
f=
r
c acts
in
merely rhythmically.
Or,
by
means of anticipation, the figuration of a melody may become more animated, as in the following
:
344.
^ i^f=f^#
g.
r
(6),
Pis'-
And
when one
voice
makes a
his opera.
La
Vestale, after
F and modulated to
full
There
it in
covering
possible liberties
we might
It
248
JVinth Part.
The Pass.
The
first
step towards
the liberation from the triple nature of our chords, and the de-
But
if
in reality this
Tor
have
neath
it, it
now
at least
melody does not belong to the chord be^ it or after it. Yet we a choice, and this new liberty has arisen from the
itself, or,
harmonic element
to speak strictly,
346.
we
see the treble pass through all the tones of the chord.
It
pro^
But knowing that the third is in degree, and that another degree lies
this in1
between
it
We go from e through d to
Thns we see
*.
The
passing-tone
and
e).
It
249
CHAPTER
THE DIATONIC
I.
PASS.
with
it.
We might
e to g.
have introduced
348.
m
we might have
re-
349.:
We see that
melody.
the
Tf=f
the chords
fall
same chord
350.
.^^ n
fall
h.
We
but a continuation of the same harmony which did not displease Still more strange would this form us to the tone d,f, and a.
be, if a
new chord
351
^ff
250
but the immediately following harmonic tone
thing in either case.
(c)
balances every-
A
chord
passing tone,
itself, is
called
a Participant Tonei^itl'-'
Sa.'
''^
Thus
two
e's
are participant-
we
consider as unessential.
Had we
we might have
by a
353.
^ ^ sM P Tf w^
*=f
we have done
this already in
In
No. -349.
Let us
now con
355,
iS^Eg^
we
see the
it is
356.
^MM=i i
I.a.
23
is
251
the subdominant and dominant chords, in which
we have
only-
we have
taken
all
Above we
all
we must remember
The above tells us that every third can be filled up with one passing tone, and every fourth with two, or, to speak strictly, with one passing-tone and one participant-tone.
neously.
Let us
at
as often as possible,
it
'
as
B we
357. A.
dz
^.^M^
1
.i-
IM
I
^ -0-0
iJ-J-
--0:^
'i
i^
y=ri
j#-* aL
^ l^fe ?
Why, at A, have we not filled out the bass have produced a peculiar kind of octaves,
358.
?
t==|:
F
would
Because
it
12*"
'^J
252
(1) which are even worse than the open octaves at 2.
A similar
case
at e
filled
alto.
Why,
have we not
It
been wrong
359.
f
but the seventh-succession between alto and bass, and the accu-
Why,
the
first
at c
case
we
and a have we not filled out the alto 1 Because in should have caused consecutive fifths between
treble
and
alto.
360.
and
between
^^ w
alto
and tenor.
253
CHAPTER
CHROMATIC
PASSES
II.
AND
ASSISTANT-TONES.
A.
Our
But
us attempt to
fill
With
rfj
diate tone d,
we seized between c and e the intermewe can now take the tone c| between c and or
rf,
between d and
e.
-^^
This gives us
Firstly,
much
to consider.
we
the key.
Secondly,
we
by
three
passing tones, and thus are led to take the whole chromatic scale
upon a
single chord.
362.
Thirdly,
we
g.
see
among
c,
^1 against
grees.
Of course we can
254
363.
t)-
iiitS33=
73SZ
i
X
iatfl :^
a =1=
I
^^
II
S>^ -&
i^
:fe
cross-relations.
But
no disagreeable
it justified.
effects
it is
merely a part
by
c| at a, is
nothing
'''$
Bd=^&:j P =5F ^
i
(c) into
we might
this,
according to
the passing-tone
harmonic tone,
sequently
it
Conin the
c raised
to
cjj,
in order to lead to
d; and
c.
-^ame manner,
at b,
d descends
to
d\,,
in order to lead to
But why, in No. 362, have we written b\> instead of a#, as it ought to be according to the above rule t or why in No. 363 have we taken /j) instead of ^rj,, or e?K and c| instead of eb and d\)t Because the strict observance of this rule would lead us to tones
too foreign to the original key, and would
notes
make
the reading of
more
difficult.
What we have
done
just
now shown in the upper voice can also be But we must look out, particulaiiy
is
room
And
must be
practicable also
365.
:^=^^^^^^B3E&=| M\
'^^m
255
two voices
simultaneously,
or
even
in
three
or
more
voices
366.
But, of course, the more passing tones we introduce above or below the harmonic tones, the more are the latter placed in the shade, and the more danger is there of causing confiision.
And
again
we
JEEJ^^fei^
rr-fi
'^0-t-f^i-
w^=-y
i
-fS
f^f^F
seIe
F-
?^|:
>J.#
^E
:f:
-&-
-J-.
In order to
suspensions,
make this phrase richer, we have introduced some but we have by no means exhausted all possible
For this would lead us into false progressions, and would overload the phrase with foreign tones. The treatment of
passing-tones.
the thesis
may
serve as an example.
m^
368.
^^^s
i-
256
With
we
by consecutive
and cross
and
B.
A pass
between
and
e| there is
by
anima-
i
the half notes of
a are resolved into quarter-notes at b, and into But between e and / we can gain no such animation by the mere passing-tone, because there is not room for
eighth-notes at o. one.
It is true,
we might avail
a harmonic by-tone
370.
=>^
many
But
use.
for
257
ted by the progression of the bass, which, too, might go from
particular aid.
We derive
it
thus
^r*i
372-9-
The d led
to e
and back to
f
c.
We
return before
we
At e and
we have
made use
of half steps.
They can be either steps or half steps, ascending or descending. Half steps are generally best for ascending. We shall have more use for these assistant-tones at a future time. At present it will be sufficient for the student to practice
chromatic passes, with the occasional introduction of assistanttones.
258
CHAPTER
THE KESULT3 OF
The
III.
PASSES.
means acquired ; then in the capability of making our voices more connected and more flowing than we were able since we deserted onr monophony. It is true that by a too frequent application of the passes, our melodies can now become too round and polished, as they were formerly too angular and rough. But our only object, for the present, is to practice these passes, and at a future time we shall be able to to judge to what degree we can make
use of them.
is
that
we
are no longer
;
we
and
Our
harmony
to
it.
now
Mozart, in the " Magic Flute," in a and animated triphonio phrase, writes thus
the harmonic element.
light
373.
i:
^
I
If.
f
The
?~K^>
Z!'
It is easily
measure are in reality nothing but the chord ffJ>-d, suspended in the upper voices by a-c and the lower voice passing from b to the
d of the next
chord.
phrase, originally,
was
374.
i^^^fc r ^ f W
259
at A, and according to rule as written at b or c but Mozart wanted a more flowing progression and he mixed up suspension, and harmonic-tone and passing-tone, A similar proceeding has
;
W-
s
r f
-r
all
tr
?2I
But
in the
now
harmony
itself,
tones,
We use them
as suspension-tones,
by making of the
at B
and c
376.
u
choii
tions.
c-e-g.
fegM i&t^ r r
IZ
lU^UM^i:
"rT
--^
^:
r
construct similar illustra-
will not
be
difficult to
Two more
illustrations here.
377.
Ei
-e>-
-yri&
"cr
H-ge
become
\-^
-^
become
suspensions.
also
new
chords,
or,
disfigure
260
degree, that
their origin.
we
The
in the
first
of these
triad.
new
fifth
major
378.
m
triad has
:|bi-
3E
a superfluous
Eti^d=^
f=
r
this circuni-
The
'
now
is
fifth,
and owing to
called
It
superfluous
fifth
,..,1,.,1,
b^J,,U..
and
it
can be used in
and
for the
formation of
new
sequences.
380.
rrr^'
Since the dominant chord
is
ff-b-d'jf-f
independently
the exception of
cend.
which, owing to
its
origin,
must
as-
S81.
'
'.J
MM.
-^
tiP'e-
f
Knowing,
further, that every septftne-chord is nothing
i^
but a triad
Here
261
382.
M.
-i
ES
I'^m^the chord
c-e-g,
i
c--^|,
the passing-chord
and
to
it
the seventh,
call
we have
which we might
all
it
were at
necessary to have a
name
for
tion.
tion of the
Formerly in No. 378, we altered the dominant chord by fifth. Let us now attempt it by depression.
eleva-
383.
ibAi
E^=^
ibA.i
it
W---
We have done
new
chord,
f-
m^
f^^
triad, if
is
at
at b
we have
once on the place of th^ proper harmonic tone, and thus formed a
g-h-d\,-f,
depressed
interval.
fifth,
And
which differs from the dominant chord by its and by the absolutely necessary descension of that as we formerly made a diminished triad from the
dominant chord, we can now make a triad from our new septimechord (f) which is even smaller than the diminished triad, and
which might, therefore, be called the double-diminished we were in want of a new name.* If this new chord
to be
* The chord d\i-g-i-f (o) boaBted formerly of a high-sounding name. Jnst because the superfluous sixth, ck-b attracted princapal attention, it was called the chord of the superfluous sixth, or some similar name and not satisfied with this, the same name was given to another chord, d\>-f-a\i-b, which had altogether a different origin, and thus, sext-chords, terz-quart chords, and This name is not quint-sext chords wei'e all thrown into one category. only superfluous, but it is absolutely unsystematical and confusing.
;
262
used tetraphonically,
ssventh, as at
it
in the above.
But
tone
it
appears favorably.
(c?l))
is
resolves
deceives us.
new means
of modulation, or mediation,
by
transfor
them the
dominant chord ;
instance, thus
384.
The minor
triad, too,
has a major
fifth,
fifth,
and by transferring
we
385.
$M
{g-h\)-e\/),
{g-byd!^)
but
which
differs
from
:
it
in its progression,
septime chord
386.
^
we
^-^
Ife
^
-&-
r
Finally,
387.
^V5
'!fn-
^t^"C3"
fc
1'^^
iZ-
"ST
-e-
fe
-xsr
ST
263
the dominant chord (a).
cession of heterogeneous
We
fifths.
suc-
Here now,
at c,
we have
intro-
duced the passing-tone ab, and at d follows the chord, /f-ab-c-e^, formed by it. The lower voices form here consecutive fifths,
which are by no means disagreeable or inapplicable nay, which can even be used, as Mozart has done, and with good effect, in slow movement.
;
388.
*;
:^-
m^^
i
:
fe
But we are led here
dent has probably
to
.-&-
stu-
made
much
and
is
the comprehensibility of these successions. too close upon another tone of the harmony,
tone
one and the same tone, the resolution of the chord brings about something so forced and confused that it can almost become incomprehensible.
admissible.
TJie successions of
T
389.
T"^
Thus,
is
F=>
let
E^ tlli
j
T-r
while at o
it is
ff &
spoUed by the position.
b,
But
Why are we justified now in making use of progressions which we formerly denied ourselves? Not merely because we now
264
consider
fit
for use,
ailalogically, instead
Here
is
We
ir-
new and
regular instead of the nearest, and thus cut off at once every fur-
Every artistic nature has within it the impulse to free itself and to become independent ; but reason must decide how &r a deviation is admissible. And, finally, we see in the passing-tones
dience to the letter.
3, the
or,
means of modulation,
and preparation of
transitions.
at
least,
the introduction
Here
390.
--F
^
G
Jfl
1^
C major,
But already
w
but modulating
in the second
we
in the third
measure into
it
'
!
major.
I
'
J_J_ j
Here we
tain the
will
that
imagine himself in G major, though the dominant chord of key does not make its appearance even at the end. The
/t]
passing-tone
key of
instead of G.
we had
we
265
Q major
we
major.
In future, therefore,
that
it
pre-
we
intended to remain in C,
been
unfit,
392.
i :*=*
r^
'f
the right one.
/ti
266
Tenth Part.
The Treatment of More or Less than Four
Voices.
Latelt we have limited ourselves to the tetraphonic composi and only occasionally represented one thing or the other with more or less voices. It requires now but a brief considera
tion,
CHAPTER
POSITIONS.
I.
We
by making use of harmonic bye-tones. Complete nonachords were altogether impossiSeptime chords could only be carried out completely with ble. five voices, and faults could only be avoided at the expense of
give us always complete chords, unless
the completeness of the chords.
It is
still
we
should
still
oftener
make use
of hannonic bye-tones.
These, however, if
we
our
make
use of passing-tones
and
it
may
not always
suit,
we
must
first
consider
What
The
harmonies
we
triads require
But
we know
267
us.
we
to
shall
have to resign
many
for instance,
we were
accompany the
first
tones of
393.
$ P=f
we had
this
It is
&
-JF
I
though
But even
complete.
we
in-
now
necessary to
know what
all
best be omitted.
that point.
We
have given
necessary information on
harmonic bye-tones.
The dominant-chord cannot be represented completely without The fifth is the interval in it which can best
be omitted.
We know, too,
we have a
diminished triad
left
make use
We
fifth
and
th.rd, unless
we
more meagre.
395.
or,
268
we
The nonaohords would have to resign third and fifth, unless preferred to exchange them for derived septime-chords, in
latter case the third
which
m-wri
1 1
we
still
closer
to successions of thirds
and
397.
^^m
We know,
tones the
flowing or animated.
rnffT^^Tf-
too, that by means of added bye-tones and pa>.i--ingharmony can be completed, and the voices made more
^m w
:^^^ Li'j ^^
1-5=
we merely
"
^^-^
:?-*! :?=^i
F-^a-
CCj'
^^m1
269
may
This, of course, is
tion.
first lesson,
but
we resume
it,
having in our
tone-
possession the
We must now confess that the mere scale, though the first and most necessary, is but a meagre basis for melody. Our phrases
have long broken through the limits of a single scale
will
;
the thesis
tonic,
nant, or has
key of the
dominant, or the
we have
embellishment by suspen-
sions, passing-tones,
&c.
in a single voice
?
be done
Beyond doubt.
easily see that
by a
single voice.
Then we can
399.
^feg^
means
for every
in the following
^--^^ i
-f:^
-S t?;
We have,
there-
Thus we see
by Sebastian Bach:
400.
gfe^^-
^ itijiqc
that
it
contains
all essential
the
sure 2 to 5)
to 6),
It
the modulation into the subdominant (measure 5 and the modulation to the dominant. will be suiHcient for us to indicate the means and possibility,
;
as the student of
illustrations.
harmony
will
have no
271
CHAPTER
II.
Wb
The
must here
still
connected,
two or more bodies, which, though form separate' choirs among themselves.
first is
A.
In
it
less frequently,
but instead of
tones, in
it
we
shall often
ble one or
careftil to
more
consequence of which
way.
Above
all,
we must
and independ-
ent course.
all
Nevertheless
it
be forced to employ duplications and progressions which are contrary to rale the greater number of voices forces them upon us
;
""
think of procuring more space for the The bass must go lower, must take the fundamental tones more frequently, in order to give a firm basis to the numerous voices. The middle voices, in turn, must cling to one
Next
to this,
we must
middle-voices.
dispersed
harmony,
Finally,
very
difficult
to control
it
every
we must always remember in the right place, to extend chord internally, {i. e. to make of the triad a septime chord,
latter a
and of the
tity
many
voices.
All these rules are so clear and consistent, and have been pre-
272
save a few attempts to apply our acquired information even
under
diiBculties.
We
ner of writing
cases,
is of but little importance, save in extraordinary and leads the student to ponderousness and affectation.
The polyphony
^upon entirely
test
something based
successions,
different principles.
and
many
Hfere
w^m
we have written a simple melody with an a<iompaniment of At b we have arranged it ootaphonically, and have introduced a somewhat richer modulation. At o and d are two,
at A,
six voices.
for seven voices. We have everywhere taken as many voices as we could introduce without diffi-
practicable enough to
add
still
more
voices.
Thus,
we have
here
273
B ^^^^
402.
i ^ i^i^
--#-
g^
B=
BE
^m^
m^^^
-.9^ -4
e=
^^m^it
*=(:
if
we
way
only with diiBculty, and even then have to cross between tones
in
polyphonic compositions,
is
among themselves an
and
4,
by
8, 5,
in B.
Wherever such
we have immeAfter
diately written the voices 3 and 4, which, together with the upper
voice,
this it
in a con6,
and
7,
though much less connected. The other voices were added as well As a matter of course, we cannot always finish one as we could.
374
)r two voices before beginning the others. It can only be done where a voice seems particularly apt to such treatment, as, for instance, the voice 8 in No. 401, or, when the general arrangement
it,
as in the following
-i.
-4-S& -3-g
i:
w
r-*-
-e-
403.
i=s
-Jzz^sz
Y
upper voice.
In conclusion,
we
will
now gite a
^W
--^
J-J-^
^^
275
rm~im
It
But
make a work
would teach us
that even in the
number of
voices
simplicity and
suffi-
is injurious.
Not
easily will a
composer overload
his
withexis-
harmony and
quiet,
steady melody,
less
satisjfiied
with a
number
eight dif-
sometimes forming
and at other
is effected
more
voices in one.
There
is
by
doubling some real independent voices, bass or treble, or perhaps have had such cases in the double-duophonic all voices.
We
For
this reason
we
can
276
405.
it
would
still
be pentaphonic.
Not even
it
into a real
we were
406.
for instance, it
wovdd
still
(page 72).
B.
This
cal
is
it is
more
practi
and
useful.
we we
can employ one or several of these masses can unite them in real polyphony.
by themselves,
or,
The
first
manner, particu-
which is not limited to periods or phrases, but which can be employed in even the closest interchange of choirs, gives to the whole manner a mobility, transparency and clearness, of which
larly,
manner
is
absolutely incapable.
this
We
277
The
position.
The different connected choirs can be employed differently one choir can be treated simply, another can be more figurated, &c.
new
polyphonic com-
position, also.
The united
must appear
when they
from the
are
all
we can
distinguish
it
From
we must treat each choir as an indeit by good upper and lower voices,
and clear as possible, while
as complete
we
all
upon us. But as soon as we consider every choir as a separate whole, the most manifold applications are open to us. While we give the hai-mony to one choir, the other can proceed in unison, octaves, or take the pedal-tones, or contribute in various ways to the effect
forces
of the whole.
All these formations will be reconsidered in the orchestral and They do not, for the present, require even a vocal composition.
particular practice.
It is suiiicient
SECOND BOOK.
THE ACCOMPANIMENT OP GIVEN MELODIES.
281
INTRODUCTION.
first book we have acquired the means which the and rhythmical elements offer us for artistic objects.
Jn the
cal
toni-
We
shall
now proceed
means
for artistic
objects.
Though we have already constructed compositions with the mere natural harmony, which in their sphere were probably satisfactory,
sitions
we were always restricted in our means, and these compoOur fiiture labors are
also
|;
2, the secular
by
their composer.*
melodies, or melodies of the people, form a music peculiar to Germany and to German composers, and, owing to their importance, German theorists have attached to them all those rules of composition which perhaps could have been attached to other musical The translator had no alternative before him, but either to give the forms. information embodied in these important branches as he found it, and to
style of
work
tion to mere principles and to adapt them to other cosmopolitan forms. The translator of this work has chosen the former, because, independent of the correct conveyance of the author's ideas, he thought it too good an opportunity of acquaiating the student with these peculiar musical forms, to let it pass for mere brevity's sake, or for other equally unimportant
reasons.]-Ed.
283
First Part.
The Accompaniment of the Choral.
The
choral melodies, as
embodied
mode
and
of
easi-
accompaniment.
generally
very simple,
by
The
them.
Even
tone
is
them
is
attached.
But in other respects it can also be called one of the richest. For the noble simplicity of its melody makes it appropriate for the most manifold harmonization and accompaniments aye, most
;
of the chords have so general a destination, that from various points of view they admit of various accompaniments, which
each in
its
Added
to this is
now
the lesson.
The
choral
the religious and artistic importance of was always, and is now an essential part
of Christian, particularly evangelical worship, and will remain so Many of these melodies have been transmitted to for all time.
us from our fathers and forefathers ; for centuries past they have been the voice of the people, their consolation and their strength
* Measural
notes,
by
the
284
they have been the armor of the church at the time of the Eeformation,
and with
all
will pass
on to posterity, perhaps for centuries to come. Even now, and ever after they are mixed up with our
as people's song, led
life,
by
the organ,
and
Thus
of the
all
But besides
is
an important part
official
and even
form.
We have already
of
many
from its respective But there^e three points in par,from which we have to* consider our lesson and to decide
different treatments, each of which'
choral.
may
melody
we
should choose
Secondly,
it
will soon
and therefore
To make
an
artistically higher
Thirdly,
we can make
From every point we can accomplish our object in various manners. We can make it 1, more or less voiced we shall generally prefer tetraThus much
as
phony
2,
3,
more more
or less rich in
harmony
285
CHAPTER
I.
A.
Confirmation of the
Key and
Modulation.
choral
melody
for
treatment
written.
charac-
it is
first
we
also
know what
of each key.
'
us safely.
chorals.
These marks, in moSt cases, will be sufficient to guide But we have to encounter a peculiar difficulty in the Many of them originate from former centuries, (or are,
and belong
to
keys en
from
either,
and which we
keys.
We
meet with
chorals which
have no signature, and which according to our former ideas would be either in
to
major or in
^ minor,
/t|
But
they end upon G, begin, perhaps, with G, and yet do not belong
predominates throughout
(d-f^-a^), they
of other deviations.
chorals, which,
keys,
still
demand a
we would produce
characteristic efiect.
It is clear,
286
They demand a
in
formation -which will form the .contents of the second part of this
book.
But
it is
above
in-
formation,
we
shall
and
is in reality
modem
287
Ima.
,
3da.
m^hnn^rr^^
s
m
m^/TS
r^. it*jt
Y=x:s=i
S^^^S^feEfEgfe
m
/Hitv^.
rJ
-*
:^
^e^,
*-T
^o^-n/i^ Ojttu
is ^a^F^fTflPq^^j^^gEi
i ^
^^^i^te
r M^-gBst ^
|g^F^
-
^twv,e;i,
Jtf/-
>t^*^
J'^^^w.^it^
<'/
m^m
ap-
F;=p=?^ i
^S^ii
2S8
iifi'-^*-
zfr.
f f r
jE3ri:=pitf:^
i ^g
'-
-0-m-
cl^cJU.f^'y^
^^^^^^
,
^r^^^^^t-d^CUkM
nr^T^=f
Ol^
*m-
^,P,,,,^./de;fe6-*v
^s^gfe
^Tt^
B^^f^fPs
i^S3
gg^F^a
=#^
?=P=f=
289
question
general modulation. The rhythmical construction of the chorals, must be our first guide.
Many
is
two parts
it is
indicated
by
the arrangement of
the whole.
$
d=
=t
zgpi
-%--
zzt
-&-
^^^
f:^^
-i
'^-
:ri
^p&ir^ M
F-F
^^^^_^|lpJ^ :^tj:/^^.
^
:^--4
.
Oh
^p=
! I
fe=-Hfe=grL=:g|
f^
iEgre
i=S:
'Sl
3E
.^_f2:
^=3
ff^f^Ff l-X
P=f
>
.d..^_
it^z -^-J
T m
:'?:
.is d: ^^s-
f-V"
tJEPfei -f
.d.
^^-?^3e&e^ f-^:
.<:1
:^
^-
::
:?:
J.
l^r=^M-T^
tP2-~
290
The second
first
indicates at tmce a
we
close, if the
melody
per-
mits
it,
in the parallel.
Each single strophe of a choral has again its close, which by means of pause or interlude, or voluntary retardation, separates Thus we have to treat each that strophe from the remainder. strophe as a separate part of the whole, and to close it with
either a half cadence, or a full cadence
;
we
consider, therefore,
which the
latter breaks
off,
more
or less satisfactorily.
therefore, at the
what conclusion of the modulation is possible and which is the nearest and most natural, and most appropriate for the progression of the whole ; and, finally, which conclusion would be most
in keeping
most
preferable.
B.
Summary
of Cadences.
moments
the
more
so, since
choral
demand
full
so
many
different cadences.
What
1.
cadences have
we now
at our
command
The
we might
major or
minor nonachord, or the derived septime chords, (these, however, form but imperfect cadences) even the dominant triad is admis
;
sible,
2.
We
G major.
407,
i
is
=F
It is
and
291
cadence closes not as satisfactorily as the piv per
the
full
cadence
decision, (the
triad of the suBdominant does not so well prepare the final chord,
it
we
-
satisfactory
all
;
events be em-
is
The
half-cadence.
This, as
we know,
it
is
formed by the
by another
cadence.
The
of the
ecclesi-
408.
i -F
r
However, imperfect such cadence may
it
"ST
must be em-
when
we have employed it on different occasions to close the thesis. All we have to remember is, that the final chord of the halfcadence, whether in major or minor,
must be a major
triad, be-
And now we have to enquire at every choral, which of the enumerated cadences are possibly applicable in it ? Most of the choral strophes end by ascending or descending one
degree of either a step or half-step.
In
;
it
c.
would go from
c to d,
or from d to c
from c to
or from h to
292
The
last
tone of the
events,
must be part of a
last
chord of the
all
must be major.
now survey
possible
or
fifth.
409.
p
1
E.C.*c ==
293
There are other closings of strophes which exhibit a repetition
of the last tone, or the descension of the third
;
in such case it
depends upon the student, and upon the adjudging of each particular case, whether to treat the last two tones as belonging to the final chord and to place the preparative chord upon the previous
tone, as here
i
411.
i^^l^
BE ^-
^^^m
J J
t goai=gjJ%FM^^F^
a
at A, or to attach the
f^
whole cadence to the
ask which of
all
m
last
two
tones,
as
at B.
And now
Let us
only,
we
is
now
fc:
J/j^ ^
"^<
j^ .^_^ ^
412.
W=3kjt^r=^
?^
=t "t
^
;
5b major
the
stands for " fundamental tone ;" 5 stands for "Fifth." The formula is thus If we take e as fundamental tone, we can make a full cadence with g-b-d-f Instead of the indicated nonachords, we can to c in C major or C minor. also take derived septime chords, and instead of fundamental chords we can
: .
take inversions. As a matter of course we need not absolutely use the triad c-e-g or ce\>-g to go to (^ but we can also substitute the sext chord e-g-c or eb-{r-c. Whether all these cadences, as enumerated here, are appropriate or not, is a question to be decided in future.
294
close can be accomplished with the
manner.
We
cadence
in the
Gf
Now,
we
It
The
first
might also end in the parallel {^G minor), and it would matter but little that the cadence would be imperfect. But, according to
our principles of modulation, this digression into the parallel comes
too soon.
closes, as
first part,
in the dominant.
it,
The
satisfactorily,
have been lame, and would have confused the harmony, which
evidently inclines towards
^ major.
The third strophe, too, might be ended with a full cadence in F, by means of the nonachord e-g-i\)-d, but here, too, it would be a mere repetition of one and the same cadence. We might close
in
is
as a first part
But have we not already considered the first strophes as a whole, which ends on the dominant 1 Consequently we
principal.
can consider the last two strophes as a second part which returns
We perceive now
S-rMjdUtXu^^,
^^'^
413.
p -00F-*
irz^zs
% F
^
r-
^-
295
"Ehis choral is really constructed in
whole
is
evidently
minor
first
would be the
parallel, B\,
major
part.
have now decided the two most important points of the modulation, to which everything else must be subordinate. The first strophe, too, might be led into B\, major, but this would be anticipating and injuring the effect of the just-mentioned
full
We
and we
prefer, therefore, to
em-
The third strophe can make a full cadence in D major, by means of an actual modulation, or can make a half cadence upon the triad of the ^minant.^ The followipg chora,! g ^2^
414.
W:^^ 3
-&
^
s
-
i^zp:
*:
3F
Ij-jj-
::izzzd
bizfz
This melody offers some
may
towards a close
In order to
contin-
a, g.
ually in
major
is
appropriate
for a half-cadence in G,
D major.
the other
But
it is
to
monotony.
D major
in in in
is,
how
shall
we make
five cadences
The ot, g can be employed for a close G major, by means of the dominant chord d-f^-a-c ; C major, by means of the nonachord g-h-d-f-a ; minor, by means of the dominant chord h-d^-f^-a ;
us, in addition to the principal
key and
We
now
prepared for
all
296
The
last strophe
We place
end ;
consequently
in the
fourth strophe.
easily
made
E
;
again in
E minor
Q major.
would have been the steady mass in E, which we gained in the above ? And where would have been the decisive juxtaposition of subdominant and dominant ? But in return we should have fallen again upon former keys
But where
in that case
E minor,
we
effect
major,
E minor,
G-
major,
E minor,
also,
G major,
the key of the But in that case the decline of the modulation in the subdominant would have been too conspicuous ; and with five major strophes, we should have had but one minor strophe, while in the above sketch there reigns abetter symmetry, i. e. two minor strophes against four major strophes or two strophfes for the principal key, two for the major, and two for the minor modulations. Thus much of the sketch of choral music. But when we re-
of former keys by returning to them. For two strophes we might have chosen,
subdominant,
we
and
we would
like to give to
many
alterations,
however appro-
We
have appeared from our present point of view. must permit such alterations, nay, consider them as ne-
may
when the melodic contents of a strophe would not agree with the harmonies of the pre-destined key.
cessary,
297
CHAPTER
As
II.
destination
and, according to
has
all
now to be arranged
decisively
and
steadily,
Again,
we
think
chords,
we
every wavering.
We
and
particularly
shall gen-
when
the
monotony, and we
to religious dignity
ial character.
We shall
sext chords.
The
latter,
would here make the harmony monotonous and weak, in consequence of our having so many endings and such short strophes.
for the preparation of the ending,
harmonic
415.
i
1=
^f^k^i^.
s
r
f^^=
'^:
T-
=M
mi
r
298
sions are apt to produce
monotony and effeminacy in the harmony, however vigorously the latter may be organized in itself.
may
devi-
The whole
melody
tells
us already
in
melody ought
to have its
to
To
its
own
the
most
re-
simple,
it is
suspension,
in-
Thus, for
treated in this
manner
416.
AJ=L=i i
BEl
3.
tone.
The tone of the melody can be considered as mere passingFor instance, the ending of the third strophe in No. 414,
417.
5S m
^^9\ ^t A
J.
ment of a separate chord for each tone of the melody. 4. We meet occasionally, as in the third and fifth strophes, of
No. 414, instead of equi-long measural
duration for one syllable.
It
parts,
notes of longer
299
sural part therein contained
;
1=
w-
rrr-r
SSfg I ~cs-jitp=rz:5=l
^^^
I I
e^d^P^I^EfePE^^^Ei ^ i f^
When a
syllable has
two measural
first and second strophe in No. 414,) these two tones can have a single chord. But it is more customary and vigorous, to give a separate chord
to each tone.
5.
We iind occasionally
same
a
case, treat the
penultimate mea-
sure of the
two measural
members
in such
note.
We can,
we
The just-men-
419.
^^^8p^^^3
s
I
,Ji5,^
?=FK
shall
?
?*F=
right in its place,
;
r
though the
is
treatment as at a or b
monic tone
sion of our
we
most appropriate
as harmonic,
It is less
member
300
because
it is
mony and
we are once
we
may be
i. e.
now turn
to the task
itself,
No. 412.
strophe
we have
two tones must be accompa; it is also most natural to begin with the tonic chord, and to the first /of the melody
that the last
We know, therefore,
we
bh-d-f.
And now we
have
harmony between these fixed points. Three times more does the / appear in the melody, and we shall find the mere repetition of the same chord too monototo find the
nous
J.
420.
.1
HF
r '-^
We must then intro-
or
its
duce
new
The nearest, and, therefore, best, is the triad of the dominant. The nearest step, now, is the chaflging of the dominant triad into
the dominant chord, which, then, leads back to the tonic triad.
422.
Bq
fe
Qfc,P=i=tt
6
c,
6b
and
c ;
301
triad, if
e\!-g-b\),
we had not
just
had that
that chord.
We prefer,
we
therefore,
were not too soon for the triad of ff, which reminds
if it
And
harmony
and accompany the following tone of the melody with the triad
of
c,
the subdominant of
ff.
Thus, the
first
this
form
r
423.
=^^
6
^^ m
6 7
3=
We
this
would be an additional reason for choosing no other chord for the tone JI7. The subsequent sext-chord gently prepares the descent of the bass a triad would cause here a stiff progression
;
regarded
the bass,
we have
in its
being an outer
voice, consequently
why the beginning could not have been made with a quart-sext chord, or a terz-quart chord on the
can
We
now
understand
424.
Obtr
:t
weak and inappropriate would the succession at a have and how insignificant at b the two inversions of one and But the greatest loss would have been in the the same chord
been
!
How
of the bass, as
we
ob-
tained
it.
in
F;
it is,
therefore, nat-
the
decision.
yields under
any
302
cii-cumstances no nearer
which
we employ
the tone
if it
/ in the bass. But we consider this dominant triad as were a tonic harmony, and follow it up with the dominant
new
key,
c-e-g.
triad of the
It
is it
triad is quite
and
the freshness of the dominant chord for the cadence of the stror
phe.
It is
chord
itself,
One more
longs to
demands
its
harmony,
for the
other
in
be-
"What can
is
this
g be
;
any
chord
The
triad of the
new dominant
it,
but
we
Would appear weak and a mere repetition. The triad of e|j, which we might choose, lays even beyond B\> major, while we are proceeding towards F.
triad of g, or to
still
time chord of ^.
But
in
is it
worth
is
intended to be
ticular reasons
modulation to
C;
it lies
now
as
we have
The second
now be
thus
'25.
fe^=r
msE
Here
are the last strophes with three diiferent basses,
303
'i=F^
=*^
=P=F=
s^
2
6 6
5
^
426.
-S 6
4
5
^=E
7
6
S=E r
which
-vrill
rtF
some few remarks
e\,-f-a-c
;
i^i
that there are
still
require
other
At
A, the
secunda chord
issues
preceding
and
has been the means of our returning most rapidly and most decisively into the principal key. The subsequent harmonies which seem as if conceived for horns, or a more frequent
ously
it
and untimely employment of them, might easily disagree with the religious dignity of the choral, and we must consider how far
otherwise, the treatment of
it
how
far
more
light conception.
the return to the principal key, in the first part of the general rula strophe, has remained undecided, contrary to the page 301. But it is here now the more decided, begiven on
At
B,
we modulate into the subdominant, }, major, and thus ascend to the principal tone. It is only in the penultimate meacause
sure,
when
c,
this principal
At
g,/)j
would have been nearest, now, to therefore the sext-chord. of 5b, but in that case the bass would have proceedtake the triad
ed in thirds with the upper voice, three or four times in succesintroduced, therefore, an actual modulation into the sion.
We
parallel
304
tion in the harmony, which, however,
tone,
by means of a
/fi-
^^
f~^'~f~r~
or
I
:^=i
?'=F^
I
437
uJH'
1
3E5
;^E
We
might have avoided
it
altogether
by an
have
we
should
lost
by
it
We
might, also, change this obnoxious /| into /, or, in other words, change the major sext-chord into minor ; this would give a more
serious turn to the whole strophe, and
in the
triad,
manner of
a,
than that of
c.
Prompted by the
foreign
we might
also turn to
thus
b:
-&-
428.
OEfc
3 5
if this
^
intention.
:^=t3p:
-&-
words or to
any particular
In that case
we
should have
made a
modulation into the parallel of the subdominant,' and at a point when foreign modulations, accordhig to rule (page 211), are not
in
their place.
This makes
it
measure, to touch once more upon the key of the dominant, and
thus to return gently and quietly into the principal key to end
there.
305
CHAPTER
III.
The
tory.
We will now
same time
and
safest.
indicate that
itself the
best
The following
of the most
slight
choral,
we
one
of
insignificant
this is
moment
to us, as long as
labor.
gives us an opportunity to
illustrate the
method of our
r-
49.ft
7f
306
We are not
must hasten
us.
But we
to its assistance, as
shall find that the
it
Yet,
we
distinctly-expressed character
for us.
If,
very
difficult
in
the above,
we
major
triad,
which
is
so forcibly indicated
by the melody.
430.
i
m
zMzziL
first
tfEfclHE=E|
^=
Tl6
m
6
;
we
should disfigure, or
in the
very beginning
and
we
have
This treatment
is,
therefore, preferable.
We
mony, as indicated by the melody, at least for the first four steps, and have confirmed the principal key in the first strophe with such harmonies as the melody admitted of The second, strophe,
too, clings to the principal key, but
with
its
minor
triads re-
dominant.
The
The arrange-
307
is
the
quart-sext
chord,
in
this
connection,
avoided.
As
432.
* ^P^
III.
second illustration,
\v;
-^-d=^\-t=i^*=-*^^61,
e\,
A^-
II.
61,
eb
t ^ i
the
first
-e
IV.
61,
I.
6b
first part,
as such.
_
,
We
first fix
it
I.,
After this
fix it also in
we
part at
II.,
and
For
it is
gloomy.
would be out of place, and the parallel would appear strange and But we now discover that the same cadence is requisite for the first strophe, and we shall consequently fix upon the
all.
parallel after
We
decide
now upon
if
the
433.
K n^liM
I
'
I.I
jc:p:
t=f=,^F=F=iF*F=*=^ff=r
1^
d_d_
*:
'^M=^
te^E^ti
308
principal key had preceded it, instead of the parallel, it would have been best to end it in the dominant, but under existing circumstances, it -will be best, perhaps, to adopt the arrangement
of No. 433.
Here, in the
gree,
first
place,
we have
from the close position of the harmony ; the chords are clearer and more dispersed, and for this reason, already, the voices are
freer
and more mobile. The observations made formerly upon the monotony of the cadences have not been made without results they have prompted us to enrich the modulation intrinsically, to touch upon the subdominant in the very beginning, and the parallel of the same in
;
would have been equally easy to enby touching the dominant chord might have been a-c-e\,-g, instead ib-ff-b],. The folIt
is treated in this manner. Graun repeats two strophes which form a first part, with different harmonization the words of the last strophe, too, are repeated in a coda, and in both repetitions the composer clings to the harmonic
;
system of the
ecclesiastical keys, to
which
we have
$s
"
But
r
p=^
;r^^^=F^=-P
-0-p^
-
^E ,^j^^La
W^.
ing,
-A
J.
When
Zi
on
--^hd
zt
:i
SS=^
&
-&
F
in
sight,
'A
=^
?f
of
e
vil,
was
Re - solved on deeds
Ap-
309
rJ
rJ
^sA
J-
J_J.
proach-ing
J SJ
de-cline.
J :J J-
.2_ -JO-
its
f^
Wliere
is
val
^^
OEE
i
fiP=
hides thee,
-M: d=
f=^E|g=f^=f.J-
^
ley
-i
-^-
:te
M J :^
Je
-
J
Lord?
That
bus,
And ye
for
fe=^i=-i:
ffS
i
2^=
-S>
^ S
blood
A. M:
now
thirst
-
J
?3I
ing.
Is
zL_d_J_^
:?2=
his
blood
f-=P= your on
H-
g^^^
P^^?%=f=-^
Is
^ S
soul!
his
blood on
your
soul?'
310
CHAPTER
IV.
we have
manner.
the harmony,
as
it
The
even in a higher conception, for they are based upon the very
elements of harmony
consider the voices as the motive
cause
by
their
already been taught to power of the harmony, becombination the harmony is formed. Suspen;
but
we have
with the means to give to our voices the necessary melodic connection, flow,
And
chorals.
this is
Let us compare,
g
434.
g^^i^^l
11*1,
I 1 I
KJ
J U-U
h^
i=J=J=iy:d=J=3=Ti
H^f-S*rrT-^r-*n*^-7?
fc;
M^
It:
^
see,
*==rat=?LjU !^
W-
;e^
m
r-
^m
It
and we
311
This
is
we aim
for
longer conceive the choral as a congregational song, but conceive it as an artistic work, to be executed by four animated, i. e., melodically-expressive voices. Though our present means
We no
the. present.
do not always permit us to elevate the voices to an animate melody, without dimming the choral melody, we shall endeavor not to neglect any voice entirely, or more than is absolutely necessary.
For
this
purpose
vocal element.
A.
Since
The Characters of
will
the
Voices.
we
what we might
call
With this
expression
we
shall designate,
/%, the
position
and
the quality of a voice of being conceivable, comprehensible, and the quality arising therefrom of being easily represented, be
now
It
possible to designate to
hensible.
It is
more important
what degree a melody ought to be compreto know on what basis the com-
A physical reason
low
it. Thus, some tones are too high some tones cannot be reached on some
instruments
represented, or are
Such considerations,
know
generally
difficult.
312
rests
The mental reason of comprehensibility or incomprehensibility upon the consistency of a tone-proportion. Tone-propor;
and representable as soon as we conthem and the more so the clearer and surer we conceive them. For this reason there are no more comprehensible toneproportions than those of the major scale and the first chords ; therefore, the minor scale, and particularly its superfluous second, is more difficult to comprehend. And thus we say that the latter developments must necessarily be more difficult of comprehension, for they are based upon more or less intricate suppositions. Thus, the development of the tone and harmonic system proves on one side the progressive difficulty of comprehension, while on the other side it enables him who has comprehended the connection of the whole, to comprehend the more distant and last fortions are comprehensible
ceive
first.
thirds, or
from one to
more
easily to
;
scale,
We
may
we need but
be sung.
characterization of the voices is justly based
The
means
upon the
by being overloaded.
It is for
we can
call it
pal voices of the vocal chorus, but they are characterized accord-
we
ofie, two, or more times. more than duophonic composition, we distinguish now,
of
all,
313
voices.
If there are several trebles
and
voices.
The outer voices, in the first place, have the most space for movements the treble above, the bass below. They are, therefore, most capable of rich development, wide passages and
;
intervals.
In the choral, as
we
it
melody.
religious
This melody
service
;
must not be
and
is
therefore
called
CANTUS PIRM0S.
Next
position,
to
it,
is
the
most
portant voice.
are
voices,
must bestow, upon that of the other voices. If any one voice has occasionally to be sacrificed, it must not be one of the outer voices, unless for some very imtherefore,
most conspicuous.
We
more
portant object.
The middle
by
is,
treble
there-
and bass.
Their character
quiet,
movement must be
progressions in large
particular reason.
some
When we now
and bear in mind the representation of the four principal voices, we voices form, as it were, two separate
couples
and
Tenor and Bass, the male voices. The Treble is the upper voice of the first couple, the Tenor the
upper voice of the second couple.
to enter
voices.
more deeply
The Tenor, the original upper voice of the male voice-couple, has movement of an upper voice, in consequence of the existence of a higher voice-couple, which made it a middle-voice.
ofi;en,
But
even
it likes
if
in
cadences,
to
assume the
free
movement of an upper
voice.
314
and instead of seizing upon the
voices
nearest,' it departs
more than necessary, or ascends beyond the alto. The Alto is the lower voice of the upper voice-couple, but it lacks the manly vigor of the b^ss, and the space for its free movement. Thus, it is absolutely middle-voice, and preserves a certain passiveness against the inroads of the tenor, clings more to the upper voice, and moves niore quietly and cautiously than
any.
The Bass, on
such
tion,
the contrary,
is
free,
As
our very
first
attempt at harmonizait.
tried to preserve
It,
too,
sometimes
in keeping
it is
done
with
and large
steps,
by
itself,
in
Thus much,
Ap-
we would
violin
voices.
and contra-basso, or
Applying
it
violoncello,
to bassoons
and
bassoon would
have the character of the tenor, and the other instruments share
in the remaining voices.
It is different
for,
have
all
But
if
B.
Application
to the
Choral.
we
shall
endeavor,
We
know
notes.
On
mulation of smaller measural parts would deduct from the rhythmical strength of a melody, instead of adding to
it.
It is
the mix-
315
and contrast of slow and rapid steps, and their employment which gives significance, animation, and variety to the rhythm.
ture
for designs,
We
shall endeavor,
teristically.
We
rhythm, but the tone-contents also as far, at least, as modulation and position have left undecided. The more vigorous and
quiet
ones
the passionate
and the
one or
as
Nor must we
upon
lead
it,
forget the
compass of the
different voices,
too,
We
shall
'
/>1\
3t:
My
Wr
^t
or
^_
, ,
11^1 nor
Ei
T^ 22
when the bass ascends or descends by octaves, or whenever we can unhesitatingly take the higher for the lower octave, we
only,
shall
also
have the advantage of guarding us against too great dispersince the higher animation of the voices tends greatly to
But
we
and moderate the use of bye-tones, so as to enable us to sustain the uniform movement of the whole, and to Increase the
animation rather than decrease
it.
reason,
and
we
treat-
316
ment Here
to
still
more
rarely to three.
yfejj:4tuxi
-^JL
;:
435.
^ 3L
M^i i
jrr^-i
il l!
?^^
p^
mmm
^
J.
'^
1
n Jjv
I
./j^_ jv
BEIEPE^^i;
^
is
gatEEEf
is
r
The
is
the
first
however much varied by suspensions or other means (as in No. 431) would not satisfy us; we had to employ different chords, and
reserve the cadence for the last beats.
first
two strophes
is
monotony
of a repetition or a halt, we thought at first of the key of A major as dominant of ; but A major being too distant from the
principal key,
inant),
we
preferred
minor (the
parallel of the
subdome-^-S.
this
key
in the
we have
317
voices
is left
to the student
the tenor
Below
The deviations from genesal been made therein without some particular reason,
rest until the desufficiently justified.
been
1
436.
#tfip:
^-^?
=*--
i j5;CTi;^ji
,_j-ji4C^
%^*^f#^^^
u
437.
*Hl
g?3EEE*
^-
318
:i=^
m^
choral, as
service,
f-r-r-
prompts us to
re-
turn to
points.
1.
TECHNICAL DIFFICULTIES,
exist in the
melody when
it
it
requires
particu-
harmony, or where
voices.
stands in the
is
way
of a
The former
the case
is
when a or when
of the harmony.
restlessly
about,
is
The latter is the case in melodies which skip when it often happens that this unsteady
voices, or causes a colliIt
movement
cases.
A. Tone-repetition.
can be
made
surmounting
B.
Phrase-repetition.
This
is
occurrence in
chorals,
Sometimes the
Frequently
intent of the choral is such that the modulation of such a repetition should not
be varied,
or, at least,
but
slightly.
and unexpected
On
is
illustration.
It
many
but
it
would be
difficult
to find a treat-
ment
319
438.
-G-
f=FF
^m F?
Here
Unfavorable to dignified, ecclesiastical harmony, are such melodies or parts of melodies as cling too firmly to one single chord,
439.
is
such a case.
^P^^^ ^^^^^m
rf^f?f*^rf^^?f
effective.
cally,
At a we have treated the first measure triphoniand the tetraphonio harmony of the next measure is the
more
At b
Tve
ness of the
Harmony and melody are merely the means of expressing what moves our soul, and what the choral is intended to arouse in the hearts of the singers and listeners. In works of unrestricted art it is the aim of the artist^of his inner promptings and conviction ^to seize what is right science cannot directly assist his prompting, and his conviction is not a subject
is
not a work of
fi-ee
or unre-
from the unfettered spirit of the artist. The principal matter (the melody) is given, and influences everything else rhythm and harmony, more or less. In
such case
occasions.
we
Therefore,
we
first
to investigate the
mean-
ing of every single choral, to seize the current which issues from
320
the
melody and
by touching upon
possible har-
by a steady development.
the
first
harmony
is
must consult what upon which the melody insists, and thence we
We
move on
dilletante ;
that
only This
course will indicate to us the proper modulation, and the progression of the voices.
321
CHAPTER
V.
VOICES.
but
it is
also possible to
mahe one
of
the other voices the abode of the melody, and in that case
we
same
clearness
we
shall
'from them.
2.
The upper
melody, will
still
in order to
we must, make it
a whole.
In bass and
middle voices
sion, in the
On
reconsideration of the
an upper
voice, as given in
we
find that
quite sufficient.
The accompanying
voices
move
in quarter
and
This similarity,
and the manner of our present treatment, (the simultaneous beginning of all the voices) give us but little hope to distinguish the
cantus firmus from the other voices, as soon as
the upper voices.
shall
we
take
it
from form
in a later
we be
But
this later
form requires some preliminary practice, and be inti'oduced here, where we speak of the
It
depends upon
us, to
we
shall
first.
we have
we
a melody
lies high, it
the tenor
322
Then we have
moving upwards,
One
;
one be better for the tenor ; one progressing in wide steps, inclining towards below, will be better for the bass. The tenor, in general, is most suitable to take the cantus firmvs.
for the alto
more appropriate
first
Having made our choice, or having a choice made for us, we fix upon the plan of modulation, sketch the harmony, and
first
attempt,
of
all,
to
make
the
new upper
voice as consistent
Where, with one harmony, this is not possible, we select anorther, or a more favorable position of the same, and finally we complete the work by carrying out the
and flowing as
possible.
other voices.
As illustration, we
take, here.
A.
the Alto.
440.
P f=5^^=f3p
i^f-^-fe^;
EPS
^
f- '
S B^ mr '-^ Jr^M
p -r
d *
323
perceive, first of all, that on account of its tone-region and moderate movement of steps, the cantus firmus is particularly ap-
We
we
namely
the
insuffi-
is -more
we were
to
avoid
441.
all
become an
mass, whether
we
select the
Nothing
but a doubling of the cantus firmus, or a conspicuous tone-medium Tvould serve us to distinguish it from the rest ; this, however,
is
the Tenor.
We know
choir,
is
male
more appropriate
Considering
this position
now
by
we
perceive that
it
the other voices, while the higher voice couple, treble and alto,
still
This teaches
us,
then, that
with particular
conspicuous.
other,
makes
it
more
and mutually support each other by means of suspensions, We progressions in thirds and sixth, or, at least, close position. need hardly repeat here, that this is not an absolute law, but merely intended to
facilitate at.d
suitable
but particularly so
Here
324
s^^^^m
I 1
f-f-r-frg
442.
eis
.J
J-
i T.^
^&%=7^^
rfcl
J-
^^e
3=
;fii
i m-r zm
'
i^:^^^^^
-
:d^:
-i
W7"
iSfT-f-
-J-
et-i
s^E^^^i^
J
J-
sP
J
I
I
l^rt^^^ Jill
n-^:ff^r7-*F->,
I
I
F=
The cantus firmus in
the Bass.
C.
The introduction of the cantus firmus in the bass, brings with it, in most cases, an inconvenience which can only be hidden, not avoided. The reason of this lies in the fact that most melodies are conceived for the treble
It
will,
therefore,
dence.
This will be
more
inconvenient,
when
the imperfect
How
dences 1
can
we now make
The nearest would be a prolongation then we have the pedal point. But of either means we must make but a limWe take ited use, or the whole will be overloaded and spread. Its high tone-region makes it a former choral as illustration.
325
perhaps, less appropriate for our object, and
we must,
therefore,
fc^
^E:Je^P^SEF^=
p#
JJ-J-J.
I I
443.
spppspp^i fTT I
I
'"
'
'
?^-?=
F-
^^ z^
W.
:*
d_J.
^
-
i
,
=p
^E
r-iKj
I
3i
I
IE
I
^
=J= p-
- ^Efe=^ --
M==f^ IE
SE
^^
^
r
ter
;
T-
g
5b
ir-
First of all
we have
materially.
first
is
chap-
known
principles, should
have closed
with a half-cadence in
jor.
F m^
But
this
closing tone of the cantus firmus (c), would have forced us to end with a quart-sext chord. "We had to consider it as fundamental tone, and to close in the parallel of the subdominant. are now at the point from which we can give a clear view
We
of the whole proceeding. It is clear the cantus firmus in the bass gives us nothing but a melodically-regulated series of tones, upon
326
which
to
we have
all,
to construct chords,
lead
Whence
septim*
above
we now
;
triad, a
it
cipation.
What
what
shall
is
we
We
select
again,
first,
most necessary
first
plan of modulation,
then
we
particular case.
Thus, our
it
finally it passes
with dominant chord and triad into the principal tone, \) major.
Let us
now
The high
small space.
cally simple.
region,
They
327
CHAPTER
MOEE AND
VI.
THE CHORAL.
more or
sary facts have been given already in the tenth part of the book.
A.
The
choral, as
we know
so
it
at present, requires
fiill
harmony,
compositions,
variety.
it
much
lacks melodical
The simple
thread.
tones,
and
mere
many
chorals
it
will
satis-
factory duophonioally.
ternal,
The reasons for triphonic or duophonic treatment are either exwhen we have not more voices: or internal, when this sim.
treatment conveys a particular expression
;
pier
for instance,
when we intend to represent the whole in a light, free, and transparent manner or when we have in view a combination of particular voices, for instance, two female voices and a bass, two
;
treble, &c.
these cases
we must
duophonio or triphonic treatment. Many good combinations will have to be sacrificed, and many otherwise less approBut in either case the priate harmonies will have to be seized. requires particular care, because the less melody of the voices
voices, the
more
preserved.
1.
In duophonic composition
accompanying
is
best to keep
328
the voices together, and to limit
tervals.
them to the most necessary inThus the following choral might be treated in this
manner
444.
m#.
f=lS
I
&?:
I1
If,
iy=
r
f ^-
W n
3
suspension, under the
will
for particular reasons, two more distant voices are taken, it be better to give to the accompanying voice a peculiar char-
well connected.
two voices, under any circumstance, will not be The above phrase would, therefore, be more apit
propriate for treble and alto, or tenor and bass, than for treble
and bass.
445.
aiS t jtt:
2. is
s?^
s
The Triphonic Treatment.
not merely richer in tones and harmonies,
This treatment
but
it
command
are
sufficient to give
beyond what is absolutely necessary. And since a richer development of the voices is permitted, we have also the means to make up in melodical volume and fullness of the single voices what we lack in numbers of chord-tones. Harmonic bye-tones,
suspensions, and passing-tones will do justice to our hannonies,
and at the same time melodically perfect our voices. But we must not lose sight of the character of the
triphonic treatment of the last choral
is
choral.
329
E
446.
II
m^^^^M
i
:SE=3
is fe^^ggai
=?2::
'P?>n*^
-jt=zt^zJlzjt
fE-:^
2221
m
The voices
mobile manner.
gE^^jE
^:^=y
447.
BrRr-^h'^^--hp-f--^-ff]fft-j>
SF=%f
--r
SS
The
triphonic choral
is
l}J_:f:_l^_^d;.d_
r
also well
fitted
to
firmus in the iower or middle voice. This requires no instruction, and simply as example we give here the above ohog^l with
the cantus firmus in the tenor.
330
mEfS^^^^Pfe3?E^3E '&
448.
e^FJq:^fej=-FP^J=!^"PT^j:=fc^d=i
=F^
P^
t^ztpz
B.
^Thb choeal
quite satisfec-
Therefore
we
more than
particular reasons
sonietimes only
we add
or to the last chords of a choral, another voice, in order to obtain a full ending.
For
331
CHAPTER
HOW
VII.
have always maintained that a choral (or any melody) can be treated in various ways, and that there is no absolutely
best
We
ment.
require, therefore, the capability and the facility to harmonize a given melody in various ways. have given the means in former chapters, and can add
We
We
we
makes us
con-
we now merely
indicate
how
the most
There
is
The
phonically
voice, the
that the cantus firmus can be placed in the upper middle voices, or the lower voice. These are the ex;
we know them at presEach of them, however, can be carried out in the most manmanners we can make use at the same time of different har; ;
we
in.
all
these various
we
and
to the cantus firmus in the upper voice. Tile internal variety, to which
is
we have
of voices which
us;
we can
The
construc-
by
332
most important for us. How can we always find new modulations and harmonies, without trusting to chance ? The reply to this question and the necessary instruction, constitute the contents of this chapter.
In general
we
we know
already.
principal
We
ingly.
first
and
fix
upon the
mo-
Next
first,
to the principal
and pass thence to the more distant. And to these end-points we lead our harmony, employing first the nearest, then the most appropriate, and finally those in general admissible, taking advantage, however, of the slightest alteration which opens
to us a
new way.
employed in one or the other manner. But now to work. We take the following choral, and simply because it contains the greatest number of repetitions in the smallest space.
449.
fc
Sgfefj?2=S=i cSasS
-0-0. .0-0-
*--
yap^
i ^EfagEf: We
shall
m
indication,
and
it
remains
The
first
strophe
the
most naturally
0- -0
^rr
450.
f=f
J-
first
two
tones,
and led
333
jlj
rf
The bass ascends rather
ner, the following strophe
far,
=t
If
but in
its
stead
we might
^lf=i-
1r
452.
A i^
mBut
let
i^^ ^S
I
al
=F
S^F
the bass
;
The exaggeration of
have begun too low.
step upwards
This gives
us a
new
treatment.
453.
^^
Jl A- -d.J-J-d
;fe^|
f=F="=r=r
,iV
I 1
I . I I
-d
.4.
^
f=F
this
454.
^^"^'
It:
6 7
it
m
all
7 for
but in
these cases
the
334
Both these fundamentiil forms exhibited a bass progressing wide
steps.
in
Let us
now attempt
voice.
i
455.
fe-^E
:ttP=
^E
m
456.
i
continue the diatonic
E^;
movement of
the bass, perhaps
We might
thus:
m^Hm^
rj
tt
r
gression ;
g^
continued thus
The bass descends here chromatically, and ascends again diatonically. But there was no need of discontinuing the chromaticpro-
we might have
*
ii
45T.
m J^J
r
i P^^^^1
-g**'
rJ=i
.5-^
ipi
=F
to close in the tonic, instead of
If
and
this
modulating at so early a
to continue either of the
we were
diatonic pro-
would embarrass us
by
unlike.
458.be
3 6
mt
8
6
g^fe
335
much
indications.
it.
We retain
tone, but
we must
find a different
harmony for the second. What now can the tone ^f be ? We have already considered it as fundamental tone, but it can also be third or fifth. The latter leads us to the subdominant of the
principal tone,
and
is,
therefore,
the nearest.
Sebastian Bach
Here
they are
&
459.
mi
r^=ff=mT
&
^
-E'l;
We
of e or
leave
it
to the
as third.
Of what ?
major
(be-
The
latter
it
minor. It is true and soon follows), but of that this tone is rather distant from our melody, and caimot well be justified in connection with the whole. But such treatment is
cause b preceded
an
illustration.
336
0--
1
460.
=Wp:
-i
m
it lies
^^
i.
3=p4
nearer
m^^^^ f=^W^
^^.
?="r^ :^
.i
r
e.
But
such
it
much
to- consider
the g as third of
As
Here
P
461.
W^r^-tfT-^OLili
a?=
m
Bach has em-
?^
we have
ployed
it
just touched
it,
without remaining in
:
it.
462.
^i^
=1 rrrrrtr
I
^^Pi^* rr-r
I
'
gai^^gi^-^gfepg
Sometimes
(at a, d, e,)
!,
and
At
from SJ minor to A minor. In the above we have always begun with the sext chord.
might, also, begin with the fundamental chord.
We
337
463.
rr-
mz
We
'^^i^Lj-J-L-ki
^
it
have attempted
here twice.
we have been
g-b-dl^,
or rather
its
sext chord.
But we have gained enough from this simple melody. A retrospection upon our work would give us the feeling of the young anatomist, who was forced to bury his knife in the most charming
formations of nature.
searched for knowledge.
He
We have
that
facts.
Every-
we have exhausted nothing. But we hope we have gone far enough to indicate how important this practice is, and that though
succeeded by other exercises,
practical contents of the
it is
in fact the
338
Second Part.
The Chorals in
It has already
been stated
chapter
I.)
that
many
to a
ac-
They
require a
one corresponding to
To
we must
;
first
be familiar with
The
These keys have been developed long before our present system
of keys and modulation was in existence
to the latter.
in,
;
They had
it
;
or submit to
for in our
;
system there
lives
more general
sible.
truth
and in
it
it
Considering
from
former system
we
The
It
upon a rhythmi-
But the antique melodies exhibit attempts of not ending Nay, the tonic and its harmony is often not even the basis, the beginning and end of the whole tone-movement.
with the dominant chord, or not upon the tonic harmony.
339
These attempts are the results of an intellectual conception of
the tone-element, the births of a truly inspired, songful period,
full
of truth,
and experiences brought down to us from one of the most eventful and important epochs in the history of art, and as such, if they otherwise agree with our present prinfew, but they are results
they form an important confirmation of the latter. But this confirmation and agreement is exhibited, not merely in what the ancients did according to our manner, but also in what they deviated from it. Thus they deviate, for instance, in
ciples,
had a different object and afterwards they achieve that object exactly according to our present
their cadences, wherein they
;
general laws.
The most
to
masters in their ideas, to obtain from them the truth therein contained, to conceive their melodies in
their
spirit,
to harmonize
is
them according
it
to their ideas.
much
because
was not conditioned by the ideas which led the ancients and
To
the latter,
among
others, belongs
the
fact,
that their system did not contain all the tones which
we
possess.
c, d, e,
and
c, d,
e,f,ff,a, 6b,
c.
The tone
chain
c,
existence at a
much
later period.
;
cf
dif-
d\,,
gb and ab
bb
and
were
from a| and
it,
temperament, the principles of the old system retained their hold, and reigned until gradually the modern system became predominant.
340
It is
also
known that
chords, suspensions, passing tones, &c., that their voices were not
But since we
shall write,
be binding upon us ; we
We merely add,
that
we have
for
341
CHAPTER
I.
1st,
keys can be regarded from a two-fold point from a melodic point, as mere scales, and 2nd, from
own
A.
The
keys.
to
make every
degree of the
eleva-
scale a tonic,
and to build upon it, without depression or Thus they obtained the scales b,c,d;
f^)
2,) d,e,f,ff,a,
.'
4,)/,
i',
b,c,d,e,f;
of which, however, they considered the scale of D, They might have added a seventh scale, from
e,f,g,a, b
btob:
S, c, d,
:
but this scale not even admitting a tonic triad, it could not become a key. The names of the above six keys were
:
1.
Ionian, from
to c;
2.
3.
Dorian, from
dto d;
e ;
Phrygian, from e to
4. 5.
Lydian, from / to /;
6. jEolian,
different
either
Their melody
or
moved
in other
342
words
if
:
its
even
moving from
From
such au-
dominant to
the scale, if
the tonic, perhaps from the Such melodies they called "phffalic;" represented in this form, was also called plagalic.
its
octave.
Fiom
It is
this
softer character.
Yet we cannot
fell
tonic,
have a certain
and
B.
flexibility.
The Harmonic
Point.
Of the
tone-chains based
upon the seven degrees of the scale, become keys which admitted of a tonic chord.
The tone-chain of ^ admits of neither major nor minor triad, the triad upon its tonic {b-d-f) being diminished ^and consequently could not become a key.
Of the remaining
admit of major
triads, vis:
c-e-ff,
^^e-c,
ff-b-d.
the Mixolydian,
They can
three scales
compared to our " Major." The other have minor triads upon their Tonic, viz :
therefore be
the Dorian,
d-f-a,
e-ff-b,
the Phrygian,
the jEolian,
a-c-e,
we
find, that
real-
mony
also.
343
to that
find
key (the Ionian) which really resembles our major, we upon its dominant the Mixolydian key, upon the dominant
latter, the Dorian, then the iEolian, and finally the Phryalways based upon the dominant of the preceding one.
al-
of the
gian,
Thus we see, as in our Quint-circle, a progression of keys ways a fifth distant from each other
D
jE",
E
The Ly dian key, if en-
closed in this circle, should find a place before C, Ionian, upon its
subdominant.
But
difference
quint-circle.
we always
have the
G to
same
G*,
all
contents, the
intervals.
The other
progression, how-
The Ionian, exactly like our major, has major triads upon the dominant and subdominant, and upon the former the dominant
chord.
Its
tonic
its
On
the other
side
upon
its
tonic,
of a dominant chord,
which however leads to the Ionian tonic (c ). Upon the dominant of the Mixolydian, is based the Dorian key. It is a minor key, for its tonic and dominant ti-iad are minor
;
(as far as
we
can
is
see, for
its
subdomi:
nant triad,
however,
major.
Upon
its
dominant
is
based
triads
Finally follows the Phrygian key, which upon subdominant and tonic has minor triads, while its dominant has neither major nor minor triad, but a diminished one, which, as it were, cripples the whole key. The Lydian key is similarly crippled by its subdominant, which admits of neither major nor minor triad, while tonic and
triads.
344
C.
It is
easy
now to
;
siastical key.
from another
natural that
we
Which
tones are
now
essential to,
it
Mixolydian?
1, the
Thirds for
minor Seventh,
for it distinguishes it
from the
Ionian.
1,
Which
it
the for
Third, because
2, the
major Sixth,
distinguishes this
In the
characteristic of
Mo\\&n we must consider as essential \, the Third, as minor ; 2, the minor Sixth, which distinguishes it
all
from the Dorian. The Phrygian is distinguished from the jEolian, and from
the other keys
by
its
its
Second, which
is
minor.
its
major
from
D.
Thus far the ancient system strictly follows the original scales. But it permits also the use of foreign tones, if they do not destroy Thus the ancients intro the essential characteristics of the key. duced the major seventh in the Dorian and jEoBan keys (cjj and for third and sixth, but not the seventh, are the essential 5'{f),
characteristics of those keys.
E.
These foreign tones permitted also a second application, by means of which each scale could also be represented upon another than the original degree.
subdominant, and
sometimes one
or
two
1
How
was
tliis
transposition eifected
We
ly
see
by
a signature ;
accidental.
to
substitute
lower
instead of
Ionian
was
F Ionian,
345
and the Mixolydian was then upon
scales
C, the
were
Ff
G,
ffy
",
e,
^Ij)
c,
d, e, f.
b\,,
C) di
a,
f, g, a,
c,
c.
5b,
d, e, f, g,
&c.
The keys
molle, in
originating in this
to
contradistinction
were
called genus
durum.
all
same manner, the substitution of /| for /H transposed fifth above. The Ionian was thus upon G, the Mixolydian upon D, the Dorian upon A,
In the
the keys a
G,
-0,
a, b,
e,
c,
d,
e,
/|, g,
c,
/#,
c,
g, a, b,
e,
d,
A,
b,
d,
fl
g, a,
&c.
fifth
The keys
designated
arising
above were
for instance
by adding
"Hypo ;"
modern system we have but two keys without signature and A minor. If we meet with melodies, which, without signature, belong to the tone-chain of D, E, or G, we must
In our
C major
consider
them
flat
( b)
indicates to
still
belong to
as
we must
consider
them
mixo(|)
Dorian or
Phrygian.
indicates to us the
ever, with a
key of
major or
minor.
Meeting, how-
melody under
this
tone-chain of -Z>, A, or B,
we must
consider
it
as
Mixolydian,
A
in
Dorian or B Phrygian. We have thus exhibited the general rule of ancient signature transposed keys. It is immaterial to us that not all keys were
melodies as
we have only to do with the we find them. It will now be easy to understand the signature of other transTo represent, for instance, the Phrygian key in the positions.
tone-chain of
D or
0,
346
, /i
<^)
9, . *.
d,
e, c,
b,
/
e|7,
^, a,
/,
ff,
*!?,
d,
e,
4,
a},,
b\,,
flats.
to be considered as
a transposed Phrygian.
Thus we see a
series of diiferent
its
keys before us
;
be represented by means of foreign tones, in more than one tonechain, and though until now we have only observed the external
it is clear that these must also have given them a diiferent internal character, which we shall endeavor, at some future time, to comprehend.
F.
we
must add, finally, that like our own system powerful means of modulation from one key
it
1.
;f the quint-circle, and pass from one major tone to another, or,
we go from
2.
vice versa.
We substitute,
minor
for major, or
major
for minor.
The ancients, too, modulated according to their quint-successionand in still different progressions but they always found diiferent keys. Or, by means of tone-transposition, they formed a new key on the same tonic ^modulated without leaving the tonicbut, here too, they had a vastly greater variety than we
;
On
more
it
modulations were absolutely inadmissible, whUe we, though generally seizing the nearest related key, are not prevented
from
Thus much
for a sepa-
and
its
treatment.
347
CHAPTER
THE
II.
lONIAIf KEY.
know already that the Ionian key is the only one among the ecclesiastical keys resembling one of our modern keys
major.
We
But
all
Lydian key, had two more, differently constructed major keys. Thus the character of each, and consequently that of the Ionian
also,
became
peculiarly distinct.
can see this at once in the order of the modulation. According to the principles of our modern system the modulation
in
We
first
to the
for instance
to
G;
this
is
the nearest,
^but
for that
common,
But
least
was
festal,
In
For, what
do we
key {A jEolian).
in three different
:
464.
^=rH=^i=^^
cadence, the
first
forms
its
tonic,
and on
its
recurrence he treats
thus
348
465.
^pi^iS^P u s^ ^^^^m
+-r
349
CHAPTER
III.
We know of
therefore with a
it,
that
it is
minor
triad
on the dominant.
It
lacks therefore
make our cadence by means we have used occasionally as a half-cadence, and which is generally known under the name of ecclesiastical cadence. This is by no means, however, the only ecclesiastical cadence, and we shall soon arrive at others. Nevernothing
left,
We have
then, but to
key a dominant chord, but it on the tonic and points towards the Ionian scale. For this reason has the Mixolydian key a peculiar inclination to modulate
into the Ionian.
Mixolydian
is
in fact Ionian
in
its
origin,
therefore
it
Mixolydian (originally
Ionian
;
F
we
a modulation which
major.
In order to exhibit the peculiar characteristics of this key give here a Bohemian choral,
(p cJ,/u^ ^... ^
>
X-M
"^^m
466.
i^3^Ji
i
^i
f
?i
f=i=
Sf-,'rrT'rT
f-
a 1
350
CHAPTER
IV.
by introducing
is
predominant^ and
the minor of the tonic cannot impress us sadly, but merely with
a deep earnestness.
is
Severe
and
strict,
most solemn music, for instance the Oredo, and in most of their ecclesiastical songs. The authentic character and the low region of most of the Dorian melodies corresponds
trusted their
short
its
own
tonic in the
, d).
But
it is
(/and
b) in
commpn, prompts
the Mixolydian
it
it
Mixolydian.
With
it
F
in
'
rare turns,
ff.
-^
*mJ
467.
*^mm^ ^mm
351
352
CHAPTEE
V,
THE ^OLIANKET.
Upon
The
the dominant of the Dorian rises the jEolian key.
Its
often
possible to have
the triad of the dominant major, and the cadence of the jEolian
key
decisive.
its
modulate into the minor or major key of its dominant, for this would require the major triad or septime chord h, rf|, /|; or h,
d\, /j(, a.
rfjj,
and
/ being
in the
./Eolian
.(Eolian
ct]
Nor can the an essential tone, /|t is not permitted. go to I) Dorian, for this would require the tone c\, and
making use of these
its
is
The
modular
tions, is satisfied
dominant (without
469.
i^^Si*^*i ur r
T'-rr
f^^:
"Cj
I
^^^m^
$
^^^^i#
r^r
ag^
354
CHAPTER
VI.
its
minor
by
its
minor Second.
d,
The
from
e.
For, it
all
of all
two half steps never succeed each other. to give to the Phrygian scale a d |,
.
we were
/, 9, a, b, c
rf|,
e,f, &c.
in succession,
and the
From this follows then, that the Phrygian key has no cadence which we should consider perfect ; nor, in fact, can it form any
cadence with tones belonging to
tones
b,
it,
for this
jj,
/jj.
it
Thus
it is
entirely dependent
from which
originated,
i.
e.
to
^)
serves in
we
major tones, the Ionian and the Mixolydian ; only that the Phrygian cadence is still less independent than the Mixolydian,
because in
its
very
final
chord
it
by
istic tones,
the tonic,
470.
i*^^
ff.
355
which are peculiar to
satisfactory as our
this key,
own
cadences.
likes the
modulation in the
latter, as
well
Weak
imder
it
Ionian.
we
we
and
its relation
melodies often begin in tones of one of these related keys, so that it is almost impossible to know at once in which key the melody
is^it^en.
H,r^.
Q^ic^^w^
472,
'^^^^m m
I
^^
m
BE
the
first
^PP
II
iUl
1^-4
fm^
r^.rf
mw^
ii-;
^f3g
Uii
m ?3^3F5J^
r
but the
next strophe having a modulation to the Ionian (7, proves that Only towards the end the former cannot be the reigning key.
we
356
CHAPTER
VII.
We have reserved
One
last.
that
even in
the ancient system, this key has never been able to acquire an
find
Lydian melodies
at
all,
Dorian melodies.
of the tonic.
all
must not be altered as long as the key is intended to be Lydian. The fact of this tone's making a dominant chord impossible (c-e-g-b\i) would not have mattered much for most of the cadences were prepared, not by the dominant chord, but by the triad of the dominant. Nor would it
b,
therefore,
have made much difference that the superfluous fourth (/ b) is an unmelodious proportion ; for it was easy enough to avoid this
step wherever
it
But
in other
b,
thei
re-
^was the
Lydian
scales
e,
d,
f,)
to such a
degree that
it
with very
it.
b,
quently could not modvdate there, and was thus crippled on one
side.
And,
;
thirdly, there
for this
loss
nant
at once characteristic of nothing and the most Every single key, except the Phrygian, had it, and without demanding a sacrifice. These are the causes of the
a modulation
commonplace.
357
Lydian's never obtaining any extensive
for our separating it
efficacy,
ecclesiastical keys.
The deep meaning of the ancient system could not be denied, and in many instances we had to accord to it more subtle distinctions
and better
own.
if
But
it
would be
to en-
we were
oifers to us,
we have in our own system, with the additional advantage that while we can make a free use of them, the ancients were restricted by regulations and rules.
These, for the standard of modern
art,
he wants
liberty.
And
in the
same degree
inefficient.
as this liberty
was
achieved, the directions which the ancient system gave for certain
objects had necessarily to
become
358
Third Part.
The Secular National Song.*
we mean
;
among
the people
not
more
strictly,
manner of the
artistical
people.
may
have
among
become
its
sense or voices
Only where
that has
been done
where
the
where
it
the people
as such
only
there
we
And
it is
most invaluable vibrations, in which every nation unconsciously exhibits the enigma of its fexistence and of its sensations. This is the deep meaning of the national song, and by it it becomes deeply significant to the musician, who is probably the most capable of taking in and comprehending the simple melody. Whatever the real national song teaches him of his art is true
.
and genuine
reason
originates.
But
for
this
very
principles,
but in the
We
rules
;
not pronounce
wrong
we do we search for the particular The people who invented them have
all
not known those nales, they have only unconsciously carried them
within them.
and nearest to
their heaits
was
* This word does not exactly express the meaning of the author, but as the translator could not find a better one, and as the true meaning of it will become apparent to the reader in the course of his studies, the translator has thought it best to retain this word.
359
the feeling of the
became
truest
moment, of the conditions under which the song Here must we look for the nearest and reasons for the melody of the song, and the deviation from
their property.
general law.
us.
Thus much of the interest which the national songs have for They are so important and so instructive that no musician
should neglect to
tate them, (that
works, (that
soul of art.
make himself familiar with them not to imiwould be vain) nor to employ them in his own would be little) but to enter more deeply into the
;
the mere performing, or meditating upon the form and' the conit
e,
ments).
upon the Piano, or by a combination of other instniFor the national song, as such, is sung by the people,
construct,
sometimes unaccompanied and monophonic, sometimes the singers from it by ear, and without regard to rule or principle,
;
often
it is
accompanied by a pe
do so, either in the style of the people, in which case his accompaniment will be subordinate or he can accomplish a higher object, i. e., by means of his accompaniment, and by its manner, he can increase the expression of the song, and thus elevate the work
;
itself,
In the
first
case the
song remains in
tional
word or sentiment. In the other case it becomes an independent work of art and can no longer be considered as a mere
national song.
To
the latter class belongs the " collection of " cyclus of songs to a distant
by
the
same
like-
We
shall
make
it
a rule to
360
CHAPTER
I.
is
the desig-
people a song
singer.
is
suits the
1.
CONSIDERATION OF VOICE-REGION.
In this selection
we must
hy
many, and must not exceed the ordinary compass Though it is impossihle to give the exact points to compass might extend, as one nation sings higher or another, it will still he well to confine ourselves to
d~f: a tone-chain which lies convenient least in reach of the lower ones.
of voices.
which the
lower than
the tenth
:
and
is
at
2.
CHAKACTBK OF KEYS.
select.
The next important point is the character of the key which we Every musician knows, or ought to know, that every
key, apart from height or depth, and apart from the peculiar
character of different instruments, has a character of its own,
now
warm, now
character
is
cool,
now
now
If
is
it
clear
and
firm,
which
at all
we have now
we
361
CHAPTER
II.
The
we
see a representation of
;
the
subordinate
we have
^generally a chord measural part or syllable,^and in order to avoid under those circumstances monotony and weakness, wa have made our harmonies energetic, and our voices as melodious as possible. But
this is altogether different in our secular
songs.
The variety of
a variety
their contents
and
their
predominating
We
no longer speak of a uniform or impartial distribuThe harmony has no longer the obligation to intion of chords. demnify us by variety and vigor for the monotony of the rhythm,
it
intends only to support the melody of the song, and the accom-
we must
decide therefore,
above
all,
upon
1.
The Measure or
ike
1
But according
to us.
to which law
Already in the
first
362
move
about.
In going
therefore, the
move from one space into another. In the same manner we have considered the various keys through which we pass in the course of a composition as so many
voices merely
spaces,
but
larger
It is clear, therefore,
space as an important
contents of one space
more
Consequently
we must keep
ic or
together as
*
much
modulatonic space, those tones of the melody which beconstruction of a song decides generally
long together.
The rhythmic-melodic
To begin then with our labor, let us take the melody of the well-known, " Qod save the Queen ;"
473,
p^ii^
it
^^
itat
tells
would be unnatural to
we
end of each
companiment
474.
^m^^^^^
^3S3
J-
fp
But we see already that there can be more than one division of spaces, and that the necessity of supporting the sectional points
of the melody
is not always alike pressing. Thus, in the above melody, we might have embraced the first two tones of the first
fifth
measure, in
363
one chord and vice versa, we might {ff, b, d, and d, /|, o, c); have given the tones of the second and fourth measures to two or
three chords.
The
upon the
but
it
char-
will al-
ways be seen, that, the more changing of chords we permit, the more weighty, and the more tones we comprehend under few chords, the more light and animated will be the song. But returning to our national song we see, that however clear and simple the above treatment, it by no means corresponds to the weight of such a song. The following would be far more
suitable
^m^
475.
m^^^
I
tT>
5;
pi
-
The
sanctissima,"
,
m^sano- tis
-
si
ma
is
si-
ma Dul
I
^=p:
m
ra,
221
--^t'.:^^
a!
iifriz
In
teme-
Ma
ter a
ma
ta,
i^i
ra
-
=F
-
=S^SEli
bis.
ta,
ra pro no
The second and fourth measures The second part would perhaps
477.
^PS 4
-iJ-J-
f^m.
S=::
-1
'A
-9- --
=?2=
364
2.
Number of Accompanying
Voices.*
we employ,
the
light will
be the
whole.
The above
judge
is
so clear that
will
how many
Two
diciously employed.
Until
in general
now
to
considered what number of voices is more appropriate for this or the other song we have add two other considerations which were not requisite in
;
the chorals
1st,
there
is
in one and the same song sometimes a section which demands a stronger emphasis
sometimes in consequence of the words, sometimes on account of the musical contents of the song itself. The mere change of forte and piano is often insufficient for such purpose ;
than another
unable to accomplish
even the peculiar treatment of the hannony will now and then be it. But the alternate use of few and many
effect.
song
478.
^^il^gH
3E3EE ^=^ :^m
full
35
:P5iii=
^^S^l
might be treated with
the shorter tones might
H
*
0 -
i^i^^pi
harmony
in the longer
lightly,
M-hile
:
tones,
be treated more
perhaps thus
* As a matter of oourse we have no reference here to the number of singers, nor to the forte and piano of instruments, but merely to the number of voices constituting the harmony.
365
:3E
479.
OFEF^;
I I
i^-^
H
'J
m
eE
^
i 1
==1-f^-
-i^-
possible,
it is
E5
But we will remember the advice given on former occasions, (Book I., first part, chapter II.) and effect this change in the num
ber of voices only at the beginning of new rhythmical sections.
In the chorals such change
would be
and occasionally
even
as
it
effective,
absolutely unnecessary,
depends above
particularly on instruments incar shall make use pable of forte and piano, or sustaining the tones, like the organ
2nd,
We
ol
As
illustration
we
known
military song
480.
^# P^T
a
5E
g:
f
In such cases the decision depends
M
is
melody demands.
Every other
direction
366
Occasionally the
number of voices
is
reduced to
make
the ac-
Until
But in this very simultaneous sounding of three more tones there was an unwieldiness and awkwardness which was long a stumbling-block to us, and which we must now try to
simultaneously.
or
overcome.
The means
for it
We have
;
seen already that the tones of a harmony can be introduced not merely simultaneously, but also one after the other
first
in the
others, like
481.
The melodic form of the harmony gives us many ingenious harmonic figurations, and which we
now
consider.
867
CHAPTER
III.
HAEMONIC FIGURATION
We
we
know
name
in melodic form. are not sounded simultaneously but one afBut in what succession? Here are three tones
2.
3.
harmony
4.
6.
6.
482.
^iig^g^g^ii
different forms.
t-
twenty-four forms, independent of the variations which might be produced by change of rhythm. Even now we see that it is next
to impossible to exhaust the foi-ms of harmonic figuration, and that we merely can give an insight into this element. First of
all let
Monophonic Designs.
In No.
arising
repetition
from three tones^ without taking into consideration toneand rhythm. Of course, every other three tones, or
The nonachord
in
signs.
tion,
we add
483.:
Eg
i^^it=
$^^^^^^m.
368
gives us endless numbers of other designs.
is
absolutely inexhaustible.
2.
In the above
we have
and
thus
we
i tlSWWW
i=i
aSsS-^^i
r
r
a we retained the
In the former cases
upper voice, at b the lower voice, and at c the upper and lower
voices, while the
middle voice
in this case
;
is
figurated.
we make a
phonic or triphonic
voices
485.
'^mm^^ HH^P
ffi
^E
$ m^ir^^Sjr^t^^^
li^i^t
m ^^m^
369
It is clear,
if re-
ance
^^^m
It will
1B=P=
We leave the
We
have
more.
not be
difficult to find
370
CHAPTER
IV.
They
fall
into
two
halves,
we
consider
them
view.
A.
The harmonic figuration is in reality nothing but an actual har mony, but represented partly or entirely in melodic form. Consequently
in our
it
has to submit to
in general.
all
If,
harmony
therefore,
we
start
from a previ-
harmony
to
as in Nos.
however,
some
Retarded Resohition.
their
harmonic
437.,
^i
-"-
--
--
-221
solved
goes to
/ descends
e,
to
e.
but ascends to g.
only
af-
terwards that
is
c follows in
b.
There
?
a similar case at
treated wrongly
No
371
the figural voice contains three harmonic voices, the tones of which do not enter simultaneously, but one after the other. This
is called
488.
It is
est satisfaction,
and
is
But the
by
is
its
more tones a
absolutely indispensable, in
many
2.
Octave
The
and e, there have occurred octave-successions which No. 486 have been made apparent. Thus we see here.
at A, c, D,
489.
m!
^3-^53.
^ "?~T
wrong
?
n
all
at A, octave-
Are such
successions
No
by no means
as distinct as
and covers them with melodic bye-tones in such a manner, and is and flowing melody that the suspicious
successions are only the consequences of the doubling of
voices.
the
But even
if
of a figurated phrase
372
490.
imm 4M =^ PT T
I
the melodic form and the intermediate steps (here a sixth between
every two
fifths)
effects
of such succes-
sions considerably.
3.
Passing- Tones.
to the harmony, they and we have often considered them
Therefore
it is
they were
fol-
harmony.
lowing
little
phrase
491.
B
I
-^r4
f->-r^^?--r-P=.i N
-d-
-P
=^z
i fipzpipi'^irprp^p; F|
\
-I
BE
=?2=
The d
measure
in the first
is first
measure
is
a passing-tone
/
Each
above
all,
373
Of these laws
there are
two
in
demand mention.
1.
Consistency of Execution.
reasoils
the designs and dii'ecand we have not passed on to others without good ^we will not depart from it now. If we have once seized
let it
it
a design,
we must
work
to the test of
its
powers.
We
from
we
shall per-
haps occasionally return to it. An unnecessary, aimless changing of design would only cause confusion and restlessness.
2.
Firm
Connection.
Each measure
pressed.
is
from tone to
The
is,
the
more apparent
lie
to each other.
1^^^
a
will
spgii
M^
as, for
i
instance
be the most firmly, the figure c the least firmly The figure b stands between the two. It is more connected. expansive than a, and less vague than c. These two merits might
the figure
-^^m
easily
^.
:j=
374
I 1
III
m
Thus
^eS
far rests the
^
is equally-
This connection takes place, either as the fundamenindicates, or the last tone of the first
first tonfi
harmony
group can be
of
tht^
second
375
CHAPTER
V.
time
now
to
is
Per-
much
we must
Passages reduced
to
Harmonic Figwration.
This
is
the passage, and the liberty to select, close, and rhythmize ac-
We
:
shall
illustrations,
I
^:^L^--j---g-
j_j
'_J
495.
LU ^iWipW ^ l^i^ i
_
I
^=n-r^fff
Here
"-
M:
F-=F^
376
At
first
we
see the
melody of the upper voice indicated by the At b and c the melody is still
visible,
while here
j^te^iA rT II
*
if^
i
it
vanishes altogether.
An
497.A
Here
^^^^^^^
^-^
3EEEJ
M m P
- -]
^t=m
g:J:
Oon
fuoco.
i^^
^^^ s^
.
tS"
sf-
to each chord.
Hen'e
498.
BES^z
fi 1-
iz
^-
we have no
duced
at the
same time an
accidental suspension.
377
2.
All our former melodies give us opportunities to practice on them the harmonic figuration. Only the irregular progression of these phrases makes the task somewhat difRcult; we must occasionally relinquish strict adhesion to the design, in order to
499.
we
C the same accompaniment in three different accompaniment threatens to overpower the melody we can easily add an harmonic accompaniment.
see at A, B, and
If this
designs.
Lfe^^
500.
If in
it
-*-h#-
-t.
^^^^fep|^
the above
we have
we
can
now attempt
501.
i
ggj;
^ m^^^m^
*=?=
378
The
figuratfon
But the
502.
Sh
The
mm
1
=l=f
'
-J:
379
CHAPTER
VI.
The harmonic
mobility, but
it suffers
harmonic
Thus here.
503.
^=
LLiLLT
J.
^i=
at c
and d we have enriched the designs of a and b by means of made them more
cannot always suit us to introduce the whole series of
fill
connected.
But
or
fifth
it
504.
$ ^
a
tifi
If
^
Consequently
But we must remember that the very step of a third or fifth was nothing but the progression from one degree to the third or
fifth,
we
380
505.
iip=ppi&=H=^^E
*The
object of the passing-tone is to lead us into
it
Instead of the three intermediate tones of a third we need take but two, and the only question arising then would be, which are
best omitted'?
must
This
is
above.
The passing-tones
keep
distant, as it were,
The
passing-
sound strange.
With the same right we can retain but one of the passing-tones, and in that case we shall select the one nearest to the subsequent
tone.
506.
The one
not lead to
P
e,
ft
is
at
a or b
but to
for the c|
does
same in descending. Of the intermediate tones between a tone and its third or fifth, below we can select or omit at pleasure. Of the following diatonic and
d.
the
chromatic passing-tones,
507. A
,
-t:-
t-
we
"^$
m^-d=i=R=H=J=iii=:R=fi:^i^
m i:^B^^SEe^pEpf3^
But we must here add a few remarks. The pass is a flowing movement, having in its completeness a softening influence upon
the melody, which, without
steps.
it,
must
S81
In incomplete passes the whole influence of the pass
ti'ated
is
concen-
upon
* ^
B u ^ 1L
o_
D _
509.
^
stt:
one.
the remaining tone, which; leads smoothly into the next one,
while
it has no connection with the preceding Such isolated tones of a pass are called
HELP TONES.
'
'
Embodymg them
510.
in
They
we
can even
511.
or introduce
512.
i 'm
^ ^^ ^ ii
-m-M
^ %^
to its contents,
and without
tions (Jb against h\ in the above) provided always that the help-
After this
we need
513.
i -&-
382
or to employ either or both in vague tone-chains of harmonic
figuration.
514.
fiiL
One
step farther.
in the repeti-
we can
-^^^^fc
and consequently we can also introduce the two in immediate
succession (b).
the chief-tone.
we might omit
first
af-
time, and unite the help-tones and let their resolution follow
terward.
'''$
Seie^
r^
of the
first
f
only that the resolution
retarded.
somewhat
TBILLS,
TUlftlS,
The
attentive student
will here perceive at once that all our musical ornaments, such as
some
justification,
reason.
Here
383
M
517.
^m^^
1=^
ijtihjt
^ig^^F
is
we see a e| against a cfc|, at b /| against /H. This secure a flowing progression of the different voices.
at A,
done to
For the
518.
^^m
hf-
519.
themselves.
the passing-tones
by
for instance,
520.
I T
5-i F^g
^-- ^--
s--^
-f
^
^
I-
we can
once.
in
We
shall, therefore,
first i ito
521
P1^^ ^^M
384
Not always, however, will such mixture be good, and least so when the two elements fall confusedly, one into the other. This
would be the case manner
if
we were
522.
iffl.
The design
in the second
is clear
enough in the
d, is
first
and
last quarters
but
/I and
relate to
g and
almost entirely
effaced.
Finally
we must add
and help-tones can occur simultaneously in two or more voices. This can lead to harmonic formations which were not in the least
intended, and which,
called
by persons fond of
be observed ; each help-tone and therewhole passing-chord consisting of such help-tones ^must
Thus we
523
Y r
at A, within the chord c-e-g
and
6b the
groups
?jt,y|,
6,^t-J,
rfjf,
and
a-rfj(-/jj
at b
we
{b\)-c-e-g)
their
own (6-(fj(/j(-a).
tells
The
however,
us at once
tha-t
the chord
is
far different.
385
CHAPTER
YII.
Thb help-tones have stepped out, as it were, from the diatonic and chromatic passes, and thence have found their way into harmonic figuration. Their practice, therefore, must be attached to the diatonic and chromatic passes. This will have the additional
advantage of reminding us of the application of the passes.
The
may serve
as a basis
524,
m
--
^i
^-
4-
^ SP'
with the
&-
Ei^i
'^'
feE3i
^^
sii
^t
^"f
'
525.
E^E^J
W
-&2
t^Sf^fati^iff
' ' !
-^
I
The
first, fifth,
The movement
it for
now
to continue
throughout the
whole phrase. In the third measure we might have written three times e and then c, but the help-tone made it less monotonous.
at a figuration of a single
a single tone,
;
we might give
526.
pgg^EJ^gi^
now
to the
Let us turn
harmonic figuration
let
us introduce
The
527.
P"^
^E?:
z^t^
ES.
ig^^^
And now we
Here
&o.
i
528.
^IS^iS
#^=r^p|?^c^^ti^
we have
zation.
Merely passingly do we remember here the rich and powerful means which rhythm oflers us, and which until now were
laying idle.
We might
Ths
like this
$^^^^
:
or of greater compass
530.
pj
^^i^^gi^ m^^^m^m
m
387
or in extended figuration
Ten.
Dolce.
531
i^^
?- _^.
*T&, e.
t' tJ:=.ti
fie-
^^ -^^^
mm
Ten.
532.
B.
we
first
it
find the melodic movement of the we hardly know what to do with it, a more animated ihythmization.
33.
g= WFi i i
'-^
^ g
-^
mere
d-
The
tone-repeti-
388
b34.ffi
=P
f f
tion (a), or with
-r
ffj
CTT
:7T'
mea&flre, oi
this
:
it (b),
upon the
first
(c),
535.
m=a
if
show how
-sj-
4-M:.
J-
*
like
In order to
rich a
536.
w ^S
it
m^Ms'mM
up
this exercise.
leaving
Were we
us the means of
sketch the bass
At
first
we might
manner
537. i5i
^^^^^
J-
^^
^
;
we would soon
tions.
It
is
arrive at
more
interesting
389
No. 537
which in
melodic basis,
539.
Bi:
nearer to No. 537
^^^^!^^
b,
much
like
the following.
640.
C.
The
little
space at our
command
is
apart, or
way we
;
into one.
The former
:
pro-
i
541.
:^f?=Ji
*jiji~(*~
!flic
e?
A:^
It
Mai^-f-
LU ^m
many
_
others.
!''_
_i
L-*^
l_l
!_:::
l_lJ
liimpbh mn-!j
v^=^^-
542,
These directions
will
be
different
We have reference to
390
THE APPLICATION OF HARMONIC FIGURATION, CONNECTION WITH PASSES, HELP-TONES, AND SUSPENSIONS TO HARMONIC PASSAGES.
The task
ficient.
is
IN
suf-
We
136.^
-&-
T-
ff^f r ^
Let us now
^^Efed
J.
^
a third.
-s-
^^^^^ ^ rr^
voices proceed diatonically.
fill
fei-
The other
::^
(^
W^:^
543.
"M^'r-i'T
i^^
iS
upper voice ?
^
Why have we,
3 P~
At
b
we have
sus-
pended
all
as a matter of course
391
-Ml
$
644.
=d=
^t^
^^^
at
ii
J^
.
^
rS
we
r
zJzz:!^
W=^^
Bi
As a
^e=r^T
tt^f^
;^^^
and varied developments which
W
545.
-^-^
et:
asj
^lrr=fs^^i
four notes of the treble can be considered as the prin-
The
first
be found
in a
more or
and bass.
given here a somewhat complicated
fail
But- though
we have
illus-
must not
most simple
designs.
392
CHAPTER Vm.
APPLICATION OF THESE
NEW MEANS TO
ARTISTIC
ACCOMPANIMENTS.
of accompaniment
We can
in
most
volatile
endless forms, as
we
and firm
that
chords,-
we
learn now,
some of the tones in No. 477, which we could not explain at the time, are nothing but help-tones. Our labor now is but trifling. We have the necessary means in hand we have practised their application, and it only depends now upon our selecting the right means for every particular task, to judge which form of accompaniment or representation is most in keeping with the character
;
of each song.
The great
similarity of
many of our
dif-
ferent conceptions of
which most or
all
makes
it
right one.
strictly
The
chords are, by means of suspensions, passes, &c. &c., the more conspicuous will be the character of this hafinonic
rarer
these chords
by
rests
accompaniment.
3. In juxtaposition
to the
393
the harmonic figuration, the fundamental character of which
is
nection of tones.
4.
The
farther
apart these
rapid the
tones,
the
more extended
the
the
figures, the
more
will this
more
simulb,)
to the fullness
and firmness
the harmonic
it
of massive motion.
5.
make
more connected,
full,
melodibally satiated, as
were.
6.
by means of passing-tones, more independent a melody will this voice become, and more attention will it detract from the principal melody.
ing voice has been developed
the
we
accompaniment
we will even change the form of accompaniment, if prompted by the deviating tendency of single verses or parts. But in every case we will ensong according to
its
contents
melody
is
to
be
In
it
;
is
accompaniment
paniment
so
but
will
itself^
that,
by
affords
a certain satisfaction
;
and contains
at legist
no disagreeable passages
for
instance,
sixth,
T=l
546.
i^
a^i
f-
:P!=F
Accompanitnent.
\,_4._ S-j_
17*
394
irregular steps in the upper voice, &c. &c.
tions will
be treated more
Here we
the
pianoforte.
S:
^^47.
^
which, in
its
first
periodical
formations.
As
is
above,
it
is
This treatment
ter.
and characoi
If
it
the rhythm,
548.
would be
final verse,
sufficient.
The
first
answer to the
mood more
characteristically
395
W^^
549.
S3
^
--*-*-H-
S3Ee!^ *^i ^^
if
^:
If this form of accompaniment should be deemed too simple, we were to give an indication of the suppressed emotion of the singer, we might form a more animated middle voice. This has in the
Fiu animato.
-sar-t
i_J
-.
t=^-M
550.
Ores
Oi
d^.
:?
L
i?=it
-T^
R-,
Nl_
9J^
-^=^-
m^^
I
r
^
-a-
r^^s^^a? biy
^e^3^5E
-g-
Sg3s|-
396
The design
song,
of the chord.
It is
is indicated again at the end of the whole. The made itself more independent from the design, and assumes a more complicated foi-m, which might have been differ-
for instance
.KS-
for the
we might
still
:
more
anxious,
resembling our
first
conception (No.
448
;)
perliaps ihus
.^
552.
_L
397
But
if
we were
to depart
still
simplicity, if the
melody were
it
to pass
we might surround
--
--
^^= &
553.
Marc.
c.
espr.
et^"
IS:
j^J44^
Fed.- piano.
J^ J ^ '~^"5"I<2>"5"
--/-N--:^
N--
Maro.
espr.
^
I
II
rt:^^F^>_dl?l
-'*-'
I
-*--:8-:r
L'-^L -pfp
^
R--^Fed.
iF:=g:
or Other nearer or
more
distant formations.
554.
^^^^^g^^pgi^
*===*
"^^^f^^
=^5Z^ ^ZlSl
w^^t
-^^m^&-
->--N-
^n^ii^^
*-:E=KEt^^S
---#-f -+-*-
iM^g
398
Finally,
is less
we
will
It
many harmonic
:
con-
ceptions.
We see in
it
the
pause in the third measure from the end, and the imperfect
cadence of the second part, two measures previous
is
;
the
same
object,
is
the
;
whom
to this
the song
addressed.
perhaps thus
|^^!S^
555.
aipi
Shall
-4^=
we harmonize
^^
556.
f=^
e^-t
5tEJEE&^
f=r
m
ei
m
-|
f^-1
-
P^N*
I
S=:
399
It
The
latter refers
We
should prefer a
full
harmonies
"
557.
^'iff^'iVr
^m^jj
^-rjJ^^Tf
E=3^^^^ggag m
T^T
*^
1f-iS-l7'i
f T^ZlT
iS-^iS^
and with the following measure we would return the
the beginning (as at
first
time to
a or
p,)
1IE=3
558.
-F-
m
'
~^~rr
^m
--
d---^J:
:fe=F
m^
h=f
-
^^tlu:
4Q0
Or,
if
we
-conceived
tjiis
song in a more
J^estless
mood,
we
659.
ess ^^
and
exercises.
3^
iti=E=3:
401
APPENDIX.
we have
at that
;
already men-
Our prelude
and though we
new
more
passages,
yet
we
could not
overcome the
first
attempts, until
we
arrived at
we now
even
now we have
to
Nor does
theory.
is
We
consider
it
true
but
it
we
to treat of it.
The prelude
is
or
by actually sounding
at
Passages like
this,
560.
402
or these,
4
561
m^
p
_(2_
-&-
bt
t
b
-z^e^:^
BE
yes
-h^
bs
^ n p
-e-
We
P
562.
W=i^
=F=
^=^
^
because
ai
^P
W^WS'
rx^^^
If
i
s
d
i
T=^^^^
less appropriate for preludes,
is
403
Here again we discover in the figural forms the proper means They mitigate the stiffness of the chords, and with all their unas.
sumingness give us the possibility of volatile formations, without preventing us from elevating ourselves to more energetic, flowing
Thus,
by means of harmonic
figuration,
m^^=^^^
563.
8va.
which, in
its
amply for its lack of harmonic variety. It would be already a progress if we employed the
for the
after
tial
figuration
if,
triad, or
essen-
we have done
here
404
S64.
Legglero.
^~^
be
practised, first
at the
We
by
manner of our
first
565.
ffi i p=f=r=rT^^^i^
SfciiEg
^m
^
A.
may
simple har-
monic
405
566.
^pi^^^ls^^l
m
^^=f=g=ta^^^ ^
^^E^
ei
^%%i
it
gives
it
requires merely a
series
and
series
of
new
we have
We
ever, as
a single
two designs
(triplets
and eighth-notes.)
we have
fied or divided,
too, this
would be
first
necessary
thus
we might omit
406
567.
3e#
Thus much of
it,
W^
this
p^
^m
ff
exercise.
by no means
diflficult
Guided by
the student
his
may
exercise
MAEX'S THEORY
MUSICAL COMPOSITION.
BY
E.
GIRAC,
NEW yOEK:
PUBLISHED BY MASON BROTHERS. 23 PARK ROW.
by
MASON BROTHERS,
In tbe Clerk's Office of the District Court for the Southern District
of
New
York.
INTEODUCTION.
My
object in writing the following Appendixes has been to con-
dense and abridge matters which, in the author, are too prolix, and
often-
ought
to
be unfolded with as
;
much
definitions
The
latter
no doubt, be
satisfied
and arguments
pressions,
skillfully linked
one
to
another
This
,
But the
former
little
benefit
man laying down a code you have to practise, that you have to avoid.' He must still do better, he must show the pupil how to observe this, and how to avoid that, by numerous examples So used to do Cherubini, perhaps the subjoined to every precept.
sion paraded
by the
writer.
The
practical
'
to the pupil,
this
greatest theorist
So did the
it
and many
others, of
is
whom
would
Nothing
more
apt to give an
Fugue
The
we
think he
lines serve to
I
show
in
what
spirit the
Appendixes have
rules, but sup-
IV
and
to
work
for
Though
commentaries
in themselves,
vi^hole
and from the treatment of the triad down to the passing-notes, where they break off, they form a compendium of the matters contained in them, in which nothing necessary to the instruction of the pupil has
been omitted.
They have
another advantage
mental laws of harmony have been laid down, so that he will have no other task
his pupil,
to
directions.
The
student will
first
Next, he should
to the
down
chapter
on the pedal-point.
given (page 215).
he will take
the text of Marx, where the fundamental principles of the pedal are
must
resort
a pedal apd some other developments are given. At this part of his work he will have to finish the Appendixes. I have confined my work to the suspensions, but they are fully developed, and more completely shown in the work of Marx. If the student be aptly possessed of the
matters treated in the Appendixes, he will be able to understand and
practise the chapter
When reading through the Appendixes for the first time, the pupil will
have
to neglect those that are
I,
mere observations on
App. H, App.
and App. K.
When
once read through, and studied carefully, the pupil will take the
text a second time,
with the text in the order in which they are referred to by numbers
inserted in the book of our author.
These
addressed to students
left to self-instruction,
As
and
to
my
students
After reading the rules and explanations, the pupil should copy
the base of the exercises
coming
after
up the
har-
mony
according
to
Before commencing
to read over
and over again the rules on the three musical motions, and watch
his
hidden or real.
After
until,
by comparing
it
he finds no
triads,
own arrangement.
When
studying the
which
most of
the faulty successions arise from breaking this connection. the student has succeeded in writing his
When
work
correctly, (and to
succeed in
this, it is
are in the Appendixes,) then he must create a base for himself, and
fill
up the harmony.
is to
be given
to the preparation,
when
figured.
The
figuring
is
that
necessary
to
The triad is figured thus, s. The diminished triad, thus, -9-. The augmented triad, thus, fs or
^s.
When
or
|,
by an
|,
ac|,
thus,
or
is
affected
by
it.
The dominant
to
jf
or
i),
The The
the
may
-?..
be the mode,
figured, %.
dominant seventh,
figured thus,
is
The
diminished seventh
figured thus,
-8-.
t.
The major dominant ninth, . The minor dominant ninth,"! "'' ''? The third is seldom figured, except when
The perfect fourth is figured . The augmented, extended, or sharp fourth, +4. The diminished fourth, -t-. The sixth, both major and minor, eBut when the sixth is suddenly altered by signatures
ing to the principal key, the accidental or signature
the figure, thus,
ijs
not belongprefixed to
is
or
be.
-a-.
sixth,
sixth is figured
or
a.
!)6.
give this figuring as the one used in a great school, and applied
;
these Appendixes
though,
confess, there is
much
that is arbi-
any other method of figurBut the ing which may convey an exact notion of the harmony.
trary in this, and I do not disapprove of
pupil
who
to.
that of the
exercises,
it.
to
with
may
student be a careful
the given
directions.
EM. GIRAC.
New-York,
My,
1854.
APPENDIX
The The preparation
A.
much
its
skill
and
art.
is
called to
proper place by
is left
may
exist
a connection which
;
he must look
his care.
for,
Besides, there
every
step,
we
mean
On
we
made
them
covered
again.
cessions.
fifths
We
Our
We
But
is
certainly there
is
it
consists in the
mo-
The fundamental
or sixth.
may
descend a second,
third,
may
ascend a second,
These
They
the Regular,
The
sion.
its
inver-
Regular Progres-
The
corresponding seventh,
The descending
The
i^
The
Progression by a Jifth gives one mutual tone.
i
The same number
these progressions
sixth, ffth,
;
of common tones
is,
is
that
As
to the
and fourth above ; and they are equally good. motion a third above, it cannot be used but under
admissible.
this
kind
is
i
is is
&c.
The
triad
may
i
Hence,
it
would appear
by a
third above, is
more
satisfactory
at its turn, is
when leading from a major to a minor triad, which made the dominant of a transient minor key by the
elevation of
its third.
common
tones.
But
the progression, a third and a fifth below, contains the fifth of the following chord. In such progression, we say that the fifth is
5
prepared ; and
whenever
we ought
to avail
Hence we will make it a rule, that all the tones which a chord lias in common with the following chord, must be pro.
ourselves of
it.
longed into
it,
as,
-^
In our following exercises
the chords
^~
we
will designate the
i
mutual tones of
by
to
this sign
Previous
we
feel
in
harmony
the
as,
^^=^b^^^
The
Oblique motion takes place
when one
i
The
the
X
Contrary motion takes place
when one
more
or
more
parts or
at
voices,
moving
same time
The
first
of these motions
is
compositions, but
when used
alone,
affords but
few resources.
is
The second
it
is
the
which
of harmony
lie in
the proper
6
arid skilful
from their motion, the theorists have fixed the following rules
1st.
Two
fifths
No more
Four
and
fall
when they
3d.
moving simultaneously
in parallel
motion,
not,
and cannot
For the
tones, in
we
making
us take
of fifths or octaves.
the two triads/, a,
c,
As an example
and g,
b, d,
of that progression,
let
which
i
It suffices to
common
tone
exists
On
the other
hand, if we consider the tones of the chord f, a, c, we discover that to meet the nearest tone of the chord g, h, d,
three parts
move up
it.
in direct motion.
Let us see
if,
accord-
ing to the second rule of the motions, there be not here some of the
errors mentioned in
to d,
In
progresses from c
to g,
fifths in
fifths,
we can
avoid
i
All
now
is right.
We
Jifth
o{ g,
b,
d,
by
/ a,
c,
to
descend
to d, whilst the
to g.
we
our
chords in this
way
=A=
which
It is
is
equally satisfactory.
to advise the pupil that, to
^
avoid faulty suc-
cessions, in
motion;
tones.
c,
many instances, it does? not suffice to take the contrary much however depends upon the position of the chordif instead
a,
in the
^m
to the tenor,
Thus here
c, is
given
to the treble.
simultaneously in
d)
;
(a,
e),
directions.
This we have
We
much
deem
it
pupil every
way
how
Finally,
we
down a
last observation,
which
is
this
not
to destroy, by an awkward arrangement of the chord Here, nection which exists between the chords.
i
have the tone
thus
c in
=i=
an improper use of the contrary motion, has not only destroyed the
connection of the chords, but has led us into the very fault of covered fifths and octaves, which we intended to avoid. As both chords
common,
to tie
The
move
all
C;
e,
g,
This
observation
of the greatest
moment
in filling
up the harmony,
No.
1.
No.
2.
^ ^
is
ite:
5
fifth
32:
#:
Ty
55&6&55 5^5 r
we meet
with a kind of
fifths
-si-
In these examples
and octaves,
which
of the student.
They
hidden
one of which proceeds upwards or downwards, one or more degrees, By filling up the skips, while the other skips to the same intervals.
the hidden interval appears real to the eye, as.
Real
5th.
Hidden Bra.
Real Sva.
In Nos. 1 and 2 there are several instances of hidden fifths and There are instances of hidden octaves in No. 1, from octaves.
measures 4
5
to 6,
to 5,
to 6, Y to 8,
to
and 9
to 9,
and 9
10
in both
upper
parts.
and 7
to 8,
between the
But all these successions are permitted whenever the upper part moves to the fifth or octave by a single step, and the lower part skips to the same intervals, as in
Nos.
and
2.
is
occasionally
broken in order
to raise the
harmony.
they move
on page 130. These conditions ought to be attended to whenever we break the connection of the chords for the sake of raising or depressing the pitch of the voices.
and
The
irregular progression
;
is
regular one
and
for
that reason,
first
We
would say,
it
There are
also cer-
scales in
which
it
scale,
from one
to two,
from
six.
and from
latter
five to six,
and
be
vice versa.
The
scale
cannot
used
in
irregular
without
The
Major Scale.
No.
3.
^^^ f=r^
rf
5 5 5
-^-j-
j-^--
T=T
- ^e-
E^^l^^
jhJTl
-J,-
iif
5 5 5
5
5-5
Minor Scale.
55"?
5
-^
Ef
-Z':3ZL
10
In both exercises, the irregular progressions produce consecutive
fifths
mentioned degrees.
chords,
it is
by contrary motion, and, in both scales, go through the aboveAs the minor scales afford but few indigenous
always advisable,
in their treatment, to get
them,
now
and
of
major mode.
So we have done
dominant triad
SEQUEBTCES,
OE PASSAGES OF TRIADS.
lone,
We
call
by
this
number of
tones,
lowing, as
i
Here
latter
&c.
the
first
tone goes
down
and the
goes up a fourth
to the third,
and so on
to the end.
These
the
in
any
strain of a piece of
music or exercise
some
have
No.
5.
I
gfe
'
^ ^
i^JJu J
I
*
,-~T"^
rc
d=t
^s
^=i
11
=c
--9--
<9-
j-d_j-.i
&Eid g
-^
T^-
^!t"i:rf: g/
"
^ F ff
^
There are
which
is
=^=^
in
indicated
No. 5 three instances of sequences, the model of At a, b, c, too, the by this dotted curve ' ' *
harmony is made
stars, the
to
ascend
to
to
At
the
;
led out of
its
usual
way
of resolution
in
(this is
which the
the
diminished
own
character,
is
assimilated to
common
triads,
;)
and forced
surrounding fun-
damentals
and
shall
No.
6.
Mince Scale.
^m^^f^r^
isssi
P
iscziS::
m p i: w i fTTr ^rr^F
^^p
12
i i^#f^p^
<g
^^==F
*
fg
gj
= -"g
i
as in the
Eitas!
I=-
=Pt
**
f f
^:^
m
But
it
In the minor scale the sequences are treated in the same manner
major
note
is
must be
at
A, where the
measure.
^ reappears
fifth
after
at the sixth
of the chord
I, d, at
e,
g,
h, at
the star;
and the
We come now
chord
is is
is
inverted whenever
;
mental
in the base
i.
e.
in the inversion
mental
is
placed in the upper parts, and the tone given to the base
its
fundamental, as such a
denomination belongs only to that tone which was the lowest in the
original construction of the chord
by
thirds.
There are
as
many
According
The
chord
first
when
is
in the base
sixth,
it
consists of a third
e.
fifth
and sixth
it is
called
chord of the
and figured
of the chord
is
in the base
it
13
consists of
it
is
2.
First Inversion.
When explaining the irregular progression, we stated (Appendix, page 9) that it cannot be carried beyond two or three chords, at most. Thus, a progression like this
:
i ^^
though the
tionable,
fi,fths
when
inversion, as
i ^^^
This progression might have been longer and equally good, as in
this
example
--
i
The
contrary motion
is
is
not
any
faulty interval.
But
if
we
parts,
we must
parts, thus
is-
i
When
ject to another condition.
or
is
sub-
damental tone
sixth then
is
given
to the
upper
parts.
:
The chord
of the
may
or
14
In the
first
it
changed
into a fourth
in
the second,
remains unchanged.
It is
first
evident, that in
a succes-
sion of sixths
we
construction,
second, so as not to
than in
:
^^
much
%
the
sixth
is
it
All
required
;
when
used in
does not
fiflih
when
standing alone,
is
almost indifferent.
i
in
1
that of
which the
fifth,
a .higher position,
as good as this
i
in
interval is
changed
into
a fourth,
The chord
Second Inversion.
the triads (| chord) can not, as the
So, if
The second
preceding, be
inversion of
made
to
we
i ^^
we
are forbidden to use the
same chords
in their second
inver-
sion.
Thus
even two consecutives
15
are not admitted, though hidden by the outer parts.
single instance, in
There
is
are allowed
it
is,
when
the
first
fourth
is
followed
by
the second
i
or
by
in
by a sharp
fourth.
The
yet
it is
is,
cannot be
somewhat
over from the preceding chord ; and the sustaining tone becomes
the fourth.
parts,
This preparation
may
^Ei
or
by the base
itself,
<Bk
At A, the sustaining a of
the chord /,
-a, c,
and
at
B, the tone
e,
As
fifth
it
differs
is,
below the fundamental of the seventh. It is not the same with whose resolution is done in the following way if
:
it
same
tone, as
i
If the resolution be effected in the the upper parts, the base, fol-
16
lowing a contrary course, keeps on the same tone, and the fourth * resolves by ascending or descending a step
i
The
either
1
made
by the
base.
by the upper
is
parts, or
necessary only for the perfect fourth ; the sharp from the second inversion of the diminished triad, has no need of preparation; we may strike these chords immePreparation
fourth, resulting
diately, thus
i
nations.
'
^
we make an
i
important observation
:
1
when
\
Finally,
chord,
is
not
bound
to the
foregoing rules
jected to
i
because in
the
its
rf
But
if,
same harmony.
upon
new
i f^L^fie
the preceding rules of resolution.
IS/S-
17
A
parts,
Notice to the Sttident. In the construction of the upper we advise him to look carefully at the consecutive fifths or
octaves, either real or covered, vi'hich are most obvious in the inversions, and, in
many
trf
guarded against.
We now
No.
7.
come
1.
^
iiS=
s-
i F^fT^
=3
No.
8.
1
^
First Inversion.
2.
^
ife
^S
^^ r
;^
T= T~"r
18
No.
9.
3.
Second Inversion.
a
i
J_J=F,
o
:?2iz:rp
(^
ilr^
^^
i ^
1
fe
id.
fi.
"-T=f^^Tf
gr: -fg
H
.-
jg -
&
^-
No. 10.
4.
-i-J^
*^
P-
^f=
i!^ ^=t
m^
6
5
i ^^
No.
^
!
i^^m
f
-f^:^
iS~~r7s
:
r^
-i.i
11.
1^
^^
E^
-rr-
t-^
^^
19
-A
I
We
1st,
^
4
;
^^a
r
f-
^
have written the above exercises on the same harmony
2dly,
first
inversion
4thly,
by using both
did so, to
inversions promiscuously.
the student understand the different features
We
make
harmony can be endowed, and induce him to difference of construction of the upper parts made neposition of the chords.
this
He may
so
derive
many
these
comparison.
After
comparing
to write
different constructions,
we would
induce him
over again
them
both with
sharps and
flats.
When
all this is
same way,
e.
We
prove
much by
manage dexterously
the difficult
work of part-building.
APPENDIX
The dominant
B.
in general.
which
the dominant has been given to serve as the basis and fundamental
which we are unacquainted, an interval termed discord or dissonance ; and this dissonance, in the present case, is a
terval, with
seventh.
The proper
The
improper are
five,
mented
mented
and augmented
interval,
is
we
:
them.
The
cannot be inverted.
and of three
to
the
near-related nona-chord.
is
or consonance,
The
and
:
disso-
for that
the Pre-
music ;
many
instances in which
it
ought
is
be prepa^red,
it
is
incumbent on us
to
81
moreover, besides the dominant seventh, there are several other sevenths, the preparation forvifhich is a
Preparation
is
which belongs
to
to the
succeeding one.
to the discord
which
it
i
I
^fesEE^^^I
,p
chord djf,
B,
i^
r
i,
They of the
to
a, is
d,f, in-
which
it is
;
prolonged.
at
it is
At A,
is
equal to
the seventh
longer ; at
C
all
shorter,
and
this
causes the
preparation to be objectionable?
The law
of resolution belongs to
ig
dominant triad
subject to
it; this
When
its
tone.
By
by
was
the lowest.
whether
There are
inversions.
as
many
The dominant
sists
seventh, in
its
original construction
by
thirds, con-
fifth,
It is
figured
\,
it
7 simply.
22
In the dominant seventh, the fundamental tone
tant
;
is
next to
it,
Consequently, the
of the chord.
is
name
to the inversions
Thus, the
minished
first
called
di-
It consists It is
of a minor third,
figured |
^^ f
In this inversion the
fifth is
diminished.
This
fifth
occurs only
As
moves upward
the tonic,
it
The second
fect fourth,
inversion (the
fifth
is
called the
third, per-
It is It is
composed of a minor
figured | or |.
and major
sixth.
^=
Some theorists advise to prepare the fourth in this inversion, and when It cannot be prepared to suppress it. Nevertheless, in practice it occurs very often without preparation. In our exercises, we shall have it prepared, and we counsel the student to do so, in his own, especially when the opportunity presents itself.
In the third inversion, in which the seventh
is
in the base,
we
latter,
and
call
it
and a major
figured
2.
^^m
This augmented fourth
other sevenths this fourth
is
perfect.
We
23
bling the base in
parts
for,
resolution, if doubled,
would have
to
do
same in the upper parts, and then a faulty succession of octaves would be unavoidable. The names of these inversions are not influenced by any change
of position in the upper parts.
Both of the
first
following are called chords of the sixth, and the others are called
^m,
=1
Jm
M
-^
pi
same
rules,
to
difiiculty,
follow the
Thus, when
descends or
in-
A
fifth.
chord
it
lacks the
is
When
the chord
;
not in-
base goes
its
usual
way
(a fifth
down
forms the
fifth.
five parts
in the
to
of which harmony ;
it
if
is
allowed
suppress the
to the
fifth.
many
fifth
instances,
it is
doubling
f the fundamental.
the
We
by simply giving
:
a motion down
i
In such an event,
we must
24
ularly,
we must
tone
always possible
to get the
resoluto the
tion-dhord complete,
by prolonging
fifth
is left out,
No. 12.
^
ife
4-e
~
^
[=?=
1^
2?I
i
At
r f=f=
ffl^a
E^
seventh' is dropped,
to the next chord.
So
it is
at the ninth
fifth is
measure.
preserved, and
moves downward
upward
to
No. 13.
A
^E
5
~rf
- 55
^
-
At N, the fifth moves down to complete the tonic, at P, it moves upward ; in both cases the fundamental traie, in the base,
takes the contrary motion.
25
No. 14.
i^
-iSrI-
l_^^
r-
.# T*!
f f-f
i^
^
-gg-
i ^
No.
SEE
-S^_ffl.
:4=
15.
m
i:^
f
"T2
i f^^
=t
t
"
^-f-
^E
No.
16.
i
z^^
j==^j-^.i
f
=t=^
^^
sP--=^
26
1
No.
Eg"- fp
I I I
17.
S^ f^m^
^E
^=-U=i
fc
r-^
-5-
5-
e^
J
-^7^
#
i"
AM:
trf
^
At
the third
fourths, the one perfect, the other
so,
is
a succession of two
Two
pure or perfect
it is
harmony ; but
not
when
the second is
first
prepared
he must,
is
also, re-
mark
that at
made
is
the funda-
first
inversion oi d,f, a;
and
into
possessed of
there
e,
latter.
At B,
c,
is
e,
g^,
i,
gs^;
this
mode
into the
major
APPENDIX
Four
fifths,
i
C.
So
it
is
here, in
No. 175.
To render
form
we have
only
to
to the
fii-st
way
Ii
\=r^
-d^&0.
^^^
Now,
fundamental
E
fifths
the consecutive
between the base and the alto part, and and treble, are tangible. Is
By
no means.
The
funda-
mental tone being struck forcibly in the accented part of the measure, remains unshaken in our ear for the whole measure and the 2d inversion makes but little impression upon it. To get
;
new
chord,
thus:
i
instead of 5, 6, 5, 6,
&c.
because
it
contradicts the
correction,
is
a combi-
28
nation of the fundamental tone with that of the inversions.
is
What
to
be done, then
We
No. 176
ence
parts,
is,
is
The only
differ-
now
exist in the
upper
alto, for
the octaves.
is
We
have established as a
6),
the
that
three
parts
moving
into consec-
utives.
From the
;
to the fourth,
we
see in this
We
will attempt
to correct it
We
have a
full
harmony.
_i_d_
^E3^
^pe
hh^
We
-II-
-^-
m-
m
same
upper parts adopted by the author, has led him into the same
correct
No. 179
in the
4-^
s |E3^ W'^^^
5 6 5 6
3fctg^
3
1
^itry-firW^m
The pupil should bear in mind, and never forget, that in three and four-part writing, the hidden fifths and octaves are strictly and
29
absolutely prohibited.
But
in compositions in
Were
it
not
such a
liberty,
it
to write
any large
never
allowed.
APPENDIX
The Diminished Triad
Our
ciency.
D.
Minor Scale.
in the
author
tells
triad in the
minor mode.
We
is
deem
it
defi-
The
diminished triad
is
degree of the
the
its
fundamental tone.
is
altogether correct.
As
gives the
it
same
result,
i. e.,
On
the minor
scale
is
From
this difference
it
of
position
resolves
because
it
But
in the
minor scale
it
nothing necessitates
to
go
to the tonic.
The
composition in the Conservatory of Paris, without forbidding absolutely the resolution of the chord to the first tone of the minor scale,
to avail
and 72.
will set
According
minor mode.
to the
we
A.
The diminished
fifth.
i
and
is
figured -5-.
31
The
tion,
diminished
triad,
This resolution
is
to the
dominant
triad.
The
-?rrHg
^^Pitg
0T~0
At A,
it
the
fifth
f in
of moving
downward
to e.
We
always
to
be done, whenever
can be.
sixth.
The
It is
first
inversion
:
is
figured thus
+.
^
B.
Its
^
at
BAD.
sT-o
znsz
^
must be avoided, on
is
elrThe combination
not,
is
unsatisfactory, and
account of the perfect fourth between the treble and base, which
=:
32
This fourth, on account of
tion.
It is
its
:
used as follows
a.
C. BAB.
*-
0T~0
S\'
33
Resolution on the Diminished Fifth on the Seventh Degree.
4-
4=:
iS 1^ *==
i^
-^j.^
f=^
First IifvKKSioN.
Ete
4 <
i
i^ *^
4-
=t==i=
1^
^
J
r f
p'rrgg
Second Invbesion.
5
.4
f=
we
prefer the
first
^
J
*=
Of
the
reason
same
part
which sounds
it.
We have
may
be
downward
fifth
because here
triad of the
in the
made
to
ascend a step
upper
lost
But
it
must
not
be
the
degree in the major scale, is by itself a triad, which has an employment and a treatment of its own ; and its resolution is independent of that of the dominant seventh
:
a character which
does not belong to the diminished triad resulting from the suppression of the fundamental chord in the minor mode.
Hence,
of
the
scale,
we deem
diminished
it
better
to
lead
down a
step,
the fifth
triad
on the
seventh degree of
the
minor
34
'
when
degree.
combined
with
the
diminished
triad
of
the
second
B.
We
for
may
common
treatment
We
some other accidental uses which have been adopted by good by the way, are common
to both
We
avail
down
here, as
when
The diminished
triad is
=^S^
35
3d. the
We
by
first
i
This
is,
t
At
least,
we
can say that the other combinations (the half cadences excepted)
Finally, there
is
We
mean
the passages, or
by any
triad
whatever of the
scale.
Examples.
*^t:
T
\i-
TT
^=t * -^
^t
$.
m
i
-s==^
f
:^=tt
3E
T
1
fE^
Here each tone of the diminished triad is carried forcibly down, by the current of the harmony, and follows the motion of the parts, such as given by the model. These instances are enough to give a
proper notion of the subject.^
APPENDIX
E.
THE KONAOHORD.
The Nonachord, whether major
nant seventh.
It is
ninth.
These two chords, having the same fundasame resolution ; but although agreebetween them one characteristic
its
is
differ-
turn,
become
In other
is
This
a fun-
Now,
has only three inversions, the very same as the dominant seventh,
but somewhat modified in their figuring, on account of the added
ninth.
made
to
nine degrees.
As name
their
of the fundamental tone, and those of the seventh and ninth, give
name
to the inversions
A.
Major Nonachord.
consists of a
It is
major
^gured
37
The
minor
first
fifth,
sixth,
|,
but in
effect,
**
^
The second
inversion
is
composed of a minor
third, figured I
third, perfect
and major
effect,
y.
.The
fourth,
third
and major
We
shall
now
its
The
to
be prepared.
The
ninth, in
its
reso-
descends a step.
No. 18.
^m
IE
^%fe e -
s
I*
i
J.
^^
We
have nothing
to
it
would be merely repeating what has been We have only to state that the fifth said of the dominant seventh. in the nonachord, whether in theinversions or n6t, must always be
the nonachord, since
38
led
up a
step, in
fifth
m
same time as above,
inverted or not.
in
latter case, the ninth first
;
and not
m
after the other.
In this chord, both the seventh and ninth can be resolved at the
In the
Example
No. 19.
'J-.
.1
^:::>s.
J-,
3=
P
usually the
fifth,
Z^r
^^P=t
its
chord-tones,
thus
m
But there
this
is
4 s i r
A
r T
It
i
to
disencumber
of the fundamental,
i
-I-
In this case,
it
fifth,
as
But
it
differs
reso-
Here
moves
up a half step
to c, the
89
in the nonachord, since, like the latter,
it
tonic, thus
i
We
as,
:^
sr
-^z
affords
have purposely omitted to give here the third inversion, as it no satisfactory 'result, on account of the consecutive fourth,
i
Nevertheless, if ever used,
-ipg-
we would
to
cause
changes
this
i
So much
for the
-gyg5
major nonachord.
to
B.
The minor
It
fundamental tone
Like
it. it
same
ninth
minor.
We
The
is
composed of a minor
Its
third,
diminished
is "Z",
-5-
fifth,
minor
sixth,
figuring
but
its effect is
'V -55-
40
The second
diminished
fifth,
and major
effect, "*j^.
The
fourth,
minor
third, sharpi
and major
inversions.
The
No. 20.
^=g
Tsc^:
^
^
FS
#Og -g
-'
'g
'
Tia
ife
I
'^that
The remarks
to
the minor.
As
it
have been made on the major nonachord apply would be superfluous to repeat thent, we refer
A, down
shall note
to the suppression
of
Here
lie
some
which we
down
in the follow-
ing paragraph.
C.
The major nonachord, when used without its fundamental, affords us a seventh, which partakes with it of the same resolution to the tonic. Nevertheless, when we look at this seventh, it presents
itself to us, at first sight,
41
leave us in doubt as to the key to which
seventh,
h, d,
it
belongs.
c, e,
Thus, the
g, or
f, a,
may
by
it.
It is
Its resolution
alone
of the key
i,
The
first
and second.
some
first
fourths,
one extended
the
other
perfect
First,
we cause
^
Second,
7+
we
lead
it
back
i
Third,
it
^.
re
6
^^^
5
b,
d, f, a, resolves
g.
The
diminished
b,
seventh can
either modes.
to
d,f,
we
a major, or
a minor.
42
Now
it
will not
be
improper
down, with
its
inversions.
No. 21.
B.
i
Efe=
c.
i?sz
S^
H-
HD.
m
It
E=
^r
a half step to the
fifth
the tonic.
goes
down
of
The
might
third,
fall
when
should ascend
otherwise,
it
may
be seen
at B.
may
descend
;
:
but care
third, thus
m
inversion, the
first
-^
With such an arrangement, consecutive fourths are the result, which are not objectionable in the upper parts. As to the third
way of resolution
(C)
is
by
any
It
is
not so in the
strict theorists,
43 No. 22.
Exercises on the Nonachokds.
Is ^i^m s^ y=fffT"f?"rtf
i-ijLJ-<f
s
=
4
5
7
-B-
t=^
^ i =fe^ f
j!
ei
1
=;
;=
i^^^^
When
omitted.
^=^^fr=r
No. 23.
'^
.S
^b
=i=^
=?-f-
rJ-4-r-J-5-
6 -5-
iT
;i
,i
^-jP^E^^E^
^-
^=^
^=1t?j=t
5 5 9
-^
44
No. 24.
'^
^E
=i=ra=
F f
7 -5-
d^ ^^
JTT
ESE
75
^f
6 5
7+5
No
25.
-*
i|j
-5-
+a
7+ 5
^^^m
5 is ii
6
ir
"ii"
il
45
No. 26.
'
*
I
fee
?S
^^^j^^
T^r-fTT"
TT
-0^-
^^^
^^-
APPENDIX
1.
F.
NEW CHORDS
OF SEVENTHS.
c,
f, g,
h,
have been
after-
a,
came
into consideration, as
e, a,
fundamental tones of
fol-
minor
triads.
as fundamentals of the
lowing seventh
a,
h,
c,
g,
d,
a, c, e, g.
They
tinguish
perly,
differ
this:
In order to dis-
we
them from the dominant seventh, and to classify them prowill give them an appellation from the degrees they ocmajor scale.
d,f, a,
e, c,
cupy
in the
So,
we
will call
g,
b, d,
a, c, e, g, the
Of these,
attention
;
the
first is
first,
is
sometimes
secondly, because
it
We will make
fundamental
a rule
to
prepare
it,
whenever
it
As
tone
the second
Its
goes to the
its
third
dominant,
finally, its
fifth
nant harmony.
In
its
original construction
fifth,
by
thirds,
it
consists of a
minor
third,
a perfect
47
It is figured 7.
all
the sevenths,
it
has
three inversions.
The
first is
composed of a major
and major
sixth, figured g,
and
is
fifth
and
sixth.
The second
and minor
4 or h I
sixth,
and
is
The
fourth,
third
inversion
is
and major
2.
sixth.
figured
^^
ate
No.
27.
Exercise.
^1
m
48
This seventh can also resolve directly into the dominant seventh,
thus
No.
28.
^
ite
zS^
m
i
:e^
3E
i
Its third
then
it
becomes a
and forms a
new
key,
as,
No. 29.
i
When
ui ^-M
I
third, the
^^m
used with such an elevation of the
doubling
example
No. 30.
^^
-gg-O-
49
At A,
to
tl)e
descend
to d,
f toyft,
causes a
it is
of the treble.
Consequently,
steps.
by chromatic
2.
The
is
g,
h, d.
Its
fundamental goes
ascends one step,
c. It
a
or
third ascends
one
step, to
a;
its fifth
to c,
to a.
first is
The
seventh descends to
fifth
has three
;
The
a chord of the
|,
and
sixth, %
the
In
its
composed of a minor
No. 31.
Example of
I
this
-^
seventh with
its
^r-^
i
I
inversions.
J=i
5-6
-si'-^-d
^-
f=
=5?Z
w-T-tjt
Second Inversion.
5-8-5
50
The
minor
its
original form,
consists of
number of
laws.
subject to the
same
No. 32.
J.
r^
^
^ $ ^=f^
q-=-
i
to the
now
No. 33.
,i
r^
f=^=^P=^r
P-
iS=i,
i=at
51
The same
by the
first
No. 34.
i ^
The same
No. 35.
:f=
i=^
i
if^
5
1^=^--
'^^
-i
^z
1^ ^
a g I
Major Sevenths.
to the
name
is
nant f, and the first of these sevenths will be c, e, g, b, and the second f, a, c, e. As with the sevenths above, we shall style
the former the Jirst major seventh, on account of
its
being placed
on the
first
They
are the
be prepared.
They
ser, to
be properly employed
and
skill, far
unpleasantly.
In their original construction
by
thirds,
major
52
Their
first
fifth,
and a minor
and figured
The second
and a major
and figured
f,
sixth.
or |
^m m
fori
11
The
fourth,
third inversion is
and a minor
sixth.
:
^^
as.
-ti
The
first
No. 36.
2d inversion.
4-s-
=1:
^
The
scale,
i. e.,
1st inversion.
3d mva-sion,
harmony of
No.
37.
i fcp^^^^S 3^
^=z
53
The
seventh,
c,
e,
g, b, resolves satisfactorily
But/",
a,
c,
e, is
far
Its
something
minor
triad, b, d,
/jjl.
Buf/t|
cannot be changed
abruptly.
rily as
c,
to fjt,
us
to resolve
f, a,
c, e,
as satisfacto-
g, b,
c, e,
is
chord, f, a,
to the
dominant
No. 38.
it
or to resolve the seventh, f, a, c, e, into the seventh of the second degree of the minor scale ; and then, by a sequence of sevenths,
we reach
No. 39.
^^. 3^
SE^
5 7 7
7+
to the
3.
Passages of Sevenths.
seventh, and
We- know now how to prepare and resolve every chord of the we are accustomed to the manner of placing them on degree of the major scale. It remains now to combine them every
in passages, or
sequences
and
this, in
to
prepare the
first
we commence
54
But what
is
A
ture.
parallel
major or minor having the same signaThus, the parallel key of g is e, because both have the
key
is that
same signature;fjj. A relative key is that major or minor having an accidental more or less than the principal key. Thus, the relatives of g, of which
the signature
is
one sharp
cfa,
and
its
its parallel,
a; and
f^
and
cjj,
and
parallel b,
key of g',
e minor.
moves a
fifth
downward, or a
Consequently, whenever
tones
S
which
first
^
i^
:
every chord in
take the triad,
seventh,
c,
whose fundamental
will be d.
If
we
/, a,
for
we
shall
passage
No. 40.
i
m^
As
it
Se
=i=
-^
^
from
t^is
results
first
and soon
to the last,
No. 41.
#:
55
Here, there is an alternation of the first and third inversions. following hegins with the third inversion, mingling with the
alternately
The
first,
No. 42.
1^
3E
^
to
is
11
r-^r
f-^
^
is
i
not so desirafre-
as
the
others,
Nevertheless,
may
be properly used
poser.
The
following
an instance of
employment
No. 43.
i
'ZSZ
^^m #
7
is,
is disre-
No. 44.
IT
:t
^m
^
w-
^
g
is
fc
iE
1
(f), the accidental is restored,
At the
star, the
made
but at
S6
thai the
minor key
may
The same
it
rule holds
When
As
will
be advis-
fifth
fundamental keeps
its
An
to
example
will
explain our
meaning.
test:
No. 45.
i
J-=-J-
^
^
^^
;
^
t ''7
*
5
It is
The Now,
third inversion
c,
to the
chords
of the
fifth
and
sixth.
we
A, B, C,
by
thirds,
we
If
we
take
and
following
succession, in
is
correct.
f gj o
{-s
* rrpv
V
41^
m
For, every upper tone answers to
its
^
7
1
We
respective fundamental.
67
urge
this practice
He
will
avoid numberless
We
remind
In conclusion,
recommend him
his
to transpose
them
into several
to write
some others of
own.
No. 47.
i^^^
:Jz=rA=J=
zscz.
9iE^
T=-
^
5
^
6
5-5-5-5
-f?
No. 48.
'^S
,^^
a=Sz -M
58
m ^^1^^^^^ _^ $
cJ=>\g
EEE
No.
49.
^^
-^
iS-
i^
,Sc:z5^
-^JL
^t^=i
-efH=^
i
:i=g=
MT
J
^=F=^
5
6
(I
"^^
L 7
'
^
7
T+
No. 50.
ii*^=f=HBf^P?=PP^P?
ts^^^^^E^
^ 7+5
^,
<l,
fc-^-r-"r
^^
7
7+5
iii ^-u-^T=l^
f=rii
^^
7
7+5
59
No.
51.
r^
jk
# r
5I
7
74.
nzzqr
5
%
g
S
f ?-rf i^e
--i-
WI
!
I
j=
E^
5
=*5
+4
l-V
No. 52.
Passages of Sevenths.
PE^
IS*
..u^
_c_
^^-^^^
e-^
-s
P-
fe
'^
^S
6
,HJg|J"^sjq^gj
f-f-n:g
6
ii
^| P"r
g 2
>
R
8
tt
5
5
^g
7+
No. 53.
'^
1
^jg=|g
"i
1=y~T"o"
5~^
3iS
T^
60
$
I
J-rJ
J-
S
i
*
i
bsl
ri
#^
1
g
bJ
J
I
is
the conclusion of a
any
The dominant
chord
is
necessary
chords,
which serve
to
must be preceded hy some other make the cadence plainer and more solemn.
hut
it
is
called
by
theorists a
formula of
we
is,
after the
We
now
consider
it
Used
thus,
of some of
its
namely
its
When
is
fundamental
is
doubled,
it
ascends a step
to the
dominant.
The
seventh
it
must descend a
step to the
61
tiiird
The fundamental
follows
its
usual
way
No. 54.
^^3^3^^^^^
This
it
is
an exception
to its resolution.
may
No. 55.
-Sr-S
^m
-
1
^.
-PP-
In the second inversion, not only the seventh must be prepared, it must directly resolve into the dominant
No. 56.
^ i
62
Hence, the following
too
is
not satisfactory, as
first
it is
encumbered with
is
many
fourths
prepared.
No. 57.
'jL
e)
e)
63
1
No. 60.
j-
i
o
I
P-
-^
:^ g=^-g^ ^g P;-e-i=Hd '^o^ i^
!i
^
I
St
'
r
-s^
9^^=^ "r~^
^*
56
jj
:i
f^rrTfT
-p
I
n-Tir
T*
^^1
No. 61.
I
r-6
=f
I ,*^
B
J-
z^
P
I
?E2
'
r
I
f
-r^*S
F^
5 5
g
5
5
ffi=?
I
s)
j=j=3JTfc=i:Jzzl r.J j a
i l
fcE
=^::s=
7
64
No. 62.
-s
"-
-^^Ts
r^
^^ ^^
>
a*
iS
=F
7+5
j ,j
3E
-7-
-rr^
&
7
=r=e
In the following example, the seventh of the second degree resolves directly into the dominant seventh, without destroying the
fullness of the cadence.
No. 63.
i=Ed=^
^f=r=F=
^
=S=i
f^
-U=f=
65
originating
In
preparing the
gives rise to a
mental tone
into a
final cadence, the seventh now before us new diminished seventh, of which it is the fundaits minor third is made major, and the chord changes
minor nonachord of the minor key, g. bling a minor nonachord as to its form, it
resolution.
quite unlike
it
in its
The fundamental
;
is
always
left out,
andyjt,
a, c, e^,
only remain
i. e.,
:
resolution is this
the
fifth lies
stationary
the seventh does the same, and changes into the major sixth of the
tonic,
which
iw ^
ite:
As can be
thirds, this
fifth,
its
original construction
by
Of
inversions, the
It
first
alone
third,
is
final ca-
dence.
consists of a
is
minor
diminished
as.
and major
sixth,
which occasionally
made extended,
%fa^-gr
^==
t-
tteJa i? ^
In order to give the voices a freer and easier motion, this diminished seventh
is
changed often
into
an augmented sixth,
as.
i r ^m*^
fe
"n
:gto|
'-^
66
Here,
dji
represents
e\f,
ejz
and, no doubt,
It
it is
an easier step
for the
treble than
followed by eb.
note,
Here we think
of intonation, and
proper
never
to
in choruses,
skill in the
As we cannot
to
whom
the
performance of choruses
entrusted,
:
ii
will
be
sharp fourths,
chorus singers.
There
is, also,
in the
minor
on the
to
which belong the developments we are now unfolding ; but particular attention
must be given
to the third,
when
in its original
by
thirds.
This
is
not admitted
and
Such a caution
is
first
inversion, in
as,
No. 64.
^^s^^ im i T^T^^fr^
=J=
I 3^^
Some
exercises will
now
67
No. 65.
I,
=i=FP
7+
- -1-
$
i
^^Ei
I
^5=^-=p=tt
I
9^=^Ef^=fy=y =^=^
-'-
S|
^ TT
its
The
as
it
first
inversion, as well
from
a, in the
preceding example.
The
following gives
the
same
^^^m ^
J
No. 66.
j-^
J-=fM
3^H3r:
)-
-ir
i
ij
:^=3:
rr-7
^
5 6 5
r^r
7
^^
68
The
key.
No.
67.
^
J
i:J:
p
I
Ji-^'r
'2_
i^d^d ?^
5 2 6
ate
^^^^^^m
jt
^i^i 'm-=^
:s_
s'
tf
|J
i^
s^s-
r3 j2
-a
tti
i5
1
Example on
dences.
F-e^i t %
No. 68.
=1=
fiE3Z
-J-"^eJ-
t=tsx
S rrrr
^
i9
f~
>5
ite
i ^
Se
-f
AjLA^^^A^ S3
F^ f
-f
t
^
:33i
E^
^^
S
sg I
69
:i^*^^
^
7
-I
-r^
;i
^S?E3 prn^
'fr^
f
p
g-
^^^^^ 5-7
i
ii^EJ
--=^f
f=-^
\^
:^
g-
77
=r=F=P
=J=;i^W
-i=4=d=
T-r
M
%
frf-^r
I
S2
-I
I
^^ \\~^
T
70
Half-Cabences.
In the
foregoing chapter,
we have
fully unfolcled
the whole
matter of the final cadences, and pointed out the chords preparing
ihem.
We now
come
is
to the half-cadences.
The
half-cadence
This repose
is
in
some
^^^
example, in the case of the pause,
In others,
it is
indefinite, as for
.
or organ-point.
^^
r
r
cadences there are some chords especially approto
As
in the final
priate to prepare the end, so also there are particular chords appropriate to prepare the half-cadences.
direct,
whan
followed directly
by
is
when
In the latter
We
can go
both scales.
Directly.
Indirectly.
MiNOK.
Directly.
Indirectly.
-pg"-
7 7
71
Secondly, from the
first
in both scales.
Major Key.
-2=f==i: i^ r-~r
^=U^^it-JCiSL-
^f-Tf"
i f
J ^^^
j-
--s=^
f
Minor Key.
^d=E^
I
S-
I,
^^
f
-VJf-
*^3=^
f
r
as.
e.
Major Key.
if
m
r
A a
5
-g
6
5
Minor Key.
i;
:v-f-
1
r
c
d=i g=lj=f
72
Fourthly, from
ther
Majoe.
j4 f JMIil^ J
s
MiNOK.
'^
Fifthly,
^^
5-
a
-
t
-<9;r
\l
as,
ftj
i
Sixthly, from the diminished seventh
its first
inversion.
P^-IB^^^
-7-
%
measure (A) of the foregoing contains a
is
The
sion,
fifth
fifth
succes-
which
superfluous sixth.
^=^P=
^
^ 1
^^
'W
&
73
!^
Tf"
At
in
*
I-
t-
there
is
fifth
same reason
as
A, above.
Besides these, there are two chords, chiefly used
to
prepare the
half-cadences, viz.
and superfluous
sixth.
1.
The Chord
is
This chord
fluous sixth.
scales.
composed of a major
and super-
It stands
Majok
o.
Minor A.
-m
It
S
diminished seventh,
are already acquainted;
seventh, of which
then, consider
to this
seems
to
be the
first
inversion of that
we
it
its
first
fifth.
We will,
as standing
It
by
itself.
In the
The
third
The
fifth de-
But
by
On
is
very easy
to
74
avoid
it,
it
objectionable.
Finally, the
No. 69.
J=d=J=Tl^:
^M^^
SEE
^-[^^'''Tf
IT
In the second, the fiindamental in the foregoing case
;
and superfluous
vi^hich
fifth
sixth
moves
as
it
a perfect fourth,
triad.
changes
of the dominant
it
The
chord
is
No. 70.
Major.
Bf^= i
f
'
f f
'W
f T
I
&c.
No. 71.
Minor.
1or
^ J=f
ill
^^=
75
As can be
2.
The Chord
tlie
but
it is
considered as standing
by
itself.
Its
to the
fundamental of the
dominant
the
triad
its its
third
must descend
is
same
of
dominant triad
fourth
fifth
up
to the
octave of
No. 72.
j=:
^-M^=&J m^
&c.
^
This fourth, being augmented, has no need of preparation.
Very
is,
often these
that
the fifth of the former resolves into the fourth of the latter,
usual
way
of resolution
and
this
also
affords
No. 73.
I
gs
^=--jq^i-^:^^
^^
^E
ti
--^
w^
76
=t^#
:i
=F=P=
zt=^
^
inversion of the seventh of
it
As can be seen at A, the perfect fifth of the fifth and sixth falls on the sharp-fourth of the third and fourth, which resolves into the
triad of the dominant.
At B, the
'
first
has
cannot forbear to draw the attention of the student to a formula of half-cadence, which has been employed by Haydn, in his work, " The Seven Words." "We have already said, on page
65,
first
We
that
the
diminished seventh of
the
subdominant,
and
its
The second
over
to the
is
changed
into
an extended second,
1^
In the
last case, the resolution
;
ceding one
that
is,
of the tonic.
77
Haydn,
lution,
in "
reso-
has made
jump down
to the
dominant, thus
:f=
^^^E ^
making it a formula of half cadence. Before him, no composer had made the second inversion of this seventh deviate from its
usual
this
way
of resolution;
is
authority,
formula of cadence
it is
seldom used.
As employed by Haydn,
however,
very
effective.
No. 74.
17=?^
^
r r
T r^
J^i-JJ-
fr
*=!;
rTrf
=t;=t=
78
=*4
S^^^^^^ ^^=^i^^^==
E
BSE^ ^
5 5
5-
K E^ S P^^ ^
J
^^
ly
T^
No. 75.
7+5
S
-7-
i
:feES
(I
^-
*-
M ^ [j'-^r~r-Y-"j-T-t
J
m
J
Melody.
V-
=^=
/L-^
j::
:^^=r
^
I
J j^
^^:
^^
=1=^
S
^7+5
I
d==^
J_r
-J^-
f=g^r^
Pi
44
2
i
a
'*-
^
5
E^^
*=j=
^
i il
=^
s
I
i
SI
f=^ r+T^ -p
^^
F^FP
.^
0_.
.tj-J3
n
W^.
i
^A
79
i=i
^ =^^ =F^
.^i
.JJ_J_
*
N. B.
i-
Jl
l-i
i^U
f
to transpose the
P^^
f
it
separately, to
make
whole of the
direction,
Not
same
we urge
APPENDIX
A
MUSICAL composition
e.
MODULATIONS.
is
grounded on a certain
scale, or key,
is
This
called the
may
occasionally be introduced;
ensue, if the
in its stead.
The
which
introduction of a
is
new key
to pass
is
technically called
a modulation.
into-another,
Modulating, then,
is
"
foreign to it."
to,
Of
some are
key, others not, which, for that reason, are called remote keys.
one,
less.
when
it
which
differs
or more accidentals.
Relative
and Remote.
1.
Relative Modulations.
The
relative
composition.
There are whole quartettes and symphonies by Haydn and Mozart, in which no other modulations are used but
Rossini
the
melodious Rossini
in
the greater part of his airs, duets, and trios, and in several of his
most effective choruses, confines himself to the relative keys. is one of which he seems particularly fond, and in which he has excelled, which might be styled the Rossinian modulation,
There
namely
key up
to the
minor
81
key of the
finest
third degree. In this he has concluded numbers of the and most graceful periods. The celebrated Handel has
built
his
mightiest effects
so that
the
in his works,
worthy of
remark.
To
is
key
made use
since
it
is
it is
the
decisive sign of
it
its
own key.
We
not.
immaterial whether
be inverted or
Let
be the princi;
next,
g, with ytt,
and
its
minor,
As we have no
l^ to
it,
accident to suppress
the
we add
which
is
same thing as
c,
if
we
and
This proceeding
next to
gives us the
e.
its
minor, d, as relatives to
Recapitulation. C, principal key ; which three are minor, and two major.
relatives, a, g,
e,
f, d, of
No. 76.
sto-
s<g-
1
^
'
fsSL
As can be
82
in
common
e,
The minor
key,
any tone
in
common
with
it.
We
have,
nective tone
e,
and
B we
and
e.
g,
b,
as mediator
will
between the
tonics, c
About
this
mediate
chord
It
we
we
is to
above given, the keys, g, e (one sharp), are not relative with the keys, f, d (one flat), as differing from each other by
accidental.
to
modulate either
from g or e to _/" or d, and vice versa, generally an intermediate chord must be placed between the key we intend to leave, and
the dominant seventh of that into
which we wish
is
to pass.
The
chord thus
+,
some other connected with it. We will mark whenever used as a transition chord between
to G.
No. 2. From
to
Minor.
^.
f^
D
Minor to
-rr^^r^
r nr-^
No. 3.From
G Major.
No.
4.
From D to E Minor.
;i
r^
83
No. 5. From
Major
to
Major.
or No.
a.
^
i^s^
G Major to D
Minor.
or No. 7.
Ei^^3
^^^ffe^
No. 7. From
i
a^i
m
m^
No. 10. E Minor to
No. 9. E Minor to F.
Minor,
or No.
11.
As we may
principal
key presents
c, e,
between these
because
used
different keys.
g, the
first,
has been
ofg
well
major.
If
we
is
a relative key
to
minor,
is
we
we
84
By
from
the
same
reason,
to
we
major
single mediator
d minor, with a
In No.
5,
we
major, to
of/
(one
flat),
by
a tonic
may
may
resolve
Then,
No.
5,
we pass from major g to the dominant seventh of the major key,f. The other Nos. require no particular observation and we shall put
;
No. 77.
:^=^
-i
^
AAA ^ p
y-fJ-l^l
^ 9
J i
J J *--^
i
-P
f=
ife
p^g &
m
uJ-J-
4=^ ^
-JO
!
r^J-pJ
^""^"^Tfrrrr-rf
1^ *
^
,-i
-*
f=
^-^
i m^rTT'r
^
^^ij-wt^^u=^
yft
i^
-^-i*-
85
No. 78.
i:e=^
ite
?=^^
^i^
r-r
E^^
-jg^
t2
ii
^^^^P=y=f
g
5
^n
^^^
No.
79.
i
^-ii
fc=r=^
fo=^-^ m
-W=^f^ t-
-t
^^
-I
-^
ij-ij
^
^
*
0--iI-
f
I-
-i
''
t t
1
'-I
i
-^-is-
'
:ii
P!i I^E
E^^
^i
^F
I I
EfgE
-^ :
i-i
86
fe=^
^ ^^^ ^^^^^
,J
j(
J
i
J J
The preceding modulations have been performed by using only but we can obtain the same result by the
;
triad,
evident,
standing
their
new
key, and
when
used,
it
e.,
the
;
is
wanted
touch
The
chord
why
in this respect,
more convenient
to
modulate with.
The
in their
^^ ^
-5-
Occasionaliy,
tions
;
we may
but
it
the
nonachord possess.
is
owing
to
its
87
adaptability to the the major and minor mode.
For
instance, in
g g major
and
all
g minor ; and
it
may
alone remove
uncertainty of key.
Finally, the minor triads, in
many
instances,
can likewise
assist
us in modulating.
the original
They
But
key.
relative modulations,
triad,
if we we must to
remote keys.
minor, and
major, or
Thus, in
triads, c
/ minor.
g minor
;
major,
JJ?
But we can change the dominant triad into a minor triad, and pass into a key of which the minor triad is relative. Thus, in the case of c major, by changing g, b, d, into g, V^, d, we are at liberty to modulate into f major and
ab major,
^ major, or c minor.
^^
i
=
^^
i& u
This minor
from one key
principal
triad
may
moving
to
to others
;
key
for
from
g major
/ major, thus
88
Na. 90.
I
i
*
El^
&c.
I
tine
ft
&
thus
=E
c,
Or
to
d minor,
in
same key of
No. 81.
i
We will
nonachords.
i ^^^=^^^
J;^
4=t=ti
-5-
--^
&0.
^^ 5 1^1?
t=tt=t
-*y-
now
by two
illustrations
of the subject.
One affords some instances of modulations by the The other is the "Wedding March/'' from the
No. 82.
4:
zJz^t
^
rr
5
'
:S^^^ rn^6 5
-t_4-
gnrr J^ w=
^^^^^^m
5
rfrrfjrrrr^n'
8,85
-
57+
89
--fffmwfy^fffr^'
ititt
5
ta 8
^^
3^
6
6
-ei-4-,
m
^
i
5
=f
into
In
this
the
dominant
at +.
A
aznzf;
iBt
Violin. /
|fa--.=J:a
p o
-=-Ht
2nd
VroLiif.
eS--^
^
=ztl
Alto.
^^
;>p
^
g.
it
Bj^so.
9^^4^##=^#tf:=te
^oco f
i i
1-'='
s^Ll
^
S*-T5<-
^m
^f^
ri
fs
:fc:ffi=Eje
^
=?s
-Mpocof
-m^
0-^
rp"
90
fe
-jg-
--^i
^iki
'
4
1
Ifefe 1
9^
*^=t=iiz -<s^z
TSi- I
o s
fi-
ri
H--
J-J-
P ^^^S^^
??q
^^
=^
(2
Tsi-r;:)-
^
f^ -f
\
i
^
n^^f^ff^
f f e>
gj
f^^^gi^^
pi:
F?5:
-(Sl
5-
^^^^J^=J^Jdgi:
12-
=?=*=?*;
^^ e ^^ ^^
^r-T i=
-Ot
^^
,
\.
P^
^g^
-g
91
^^^^^m
i
PP=F i
-P
\ti
J>
1-*-*>-*-
mmi^^s^^
^
pign^- Sg^za AoL
-M-
(t.
^l ^
Pg
This piece
is
&
admirable
for its simplicity,
it is
and remarkably
Besides, there
fit
for
the circumstance in
which
performed.
is in its
making the listener's mind feel the happiness must have enjoyed upon the occasion.
the
enamored couple
The
major, at
and
harmony moves
first is
into
part of his
compo-
called a transition j
e.,
a piece of music in a
new
key.
At
(F)
makes two
small modulations, one into a minor (E) and the other into d major
;
and
finally,
may
by a
be seen here
how
the
made
interesting
skilful blending
of these
keys.
We
vation,
.last
obser-
which should always be kept in view that is, not to multiply modulations, so as "to take away the unity and firmness of the whole structure ;" in other words, we must use modulations moderately, and allow the principal key to be predominant, whatever
may
92
2.
Remote Modulations.
already given
so
it
From
it
the
definition
is
of
Remote
Modulatioiii,,
by
the principal
key, as
appear,
disagrees with
the
;
at
first
brought about
yet
is
A remote
key
is
by no
will
means a great deal harder to be got than a relative lay down here some directions, which will enable
bring about the most used of those keys.
one.
We
the student to
number
to
for
many
others
may
still
be discovered by a
man
of genius
the
to time, discover
may
For
minor,
we can reach
the keys,
minor and
to their
No. 83.
From G Major to F
minor.
^^^^^^
Sla
^
b
>
&C.
.,
Ug
6
'P
93
No. 84.
From C Major to G
Minor.
^^=^^i
Sis-
=fe
&0.
^=f
Moreover, in every scale there are three minor
after the principal tonic
triads.
Then,
if
we
ive chords for the dominant seventh of their respective major ones,
we gain
c
a.Te
f ae
a
e-
The minor
triads in the
key of
c e.
df^ 'ie
^ ia, 4
to
No.' 85.
From C
Example.
Major.
From C
to
Major.
'Thiis,
five
modulations
irito
i.-
keys (three major, and two minor), which are based on the following degrees the major on the second, third, and sixth degrees
:
fifth
degrees.
We
perform these
94
modulations with the same transition chords which have enabled
us
to
The minor
keys
diiferent
The alteration which the third of a chord may undergo, 2. when changed from major to minor, or from minor to major, can
lead us to keys followed by
more or less distant. This proceeding is frequently Haydn, Mozart, Beethoven, Meyerbeer, and other celebrated composers. For instance, to modulate from g major to e? major, we change the major triad, g, b, d, into g, IP, d, which
reminds us immediately of
said modulation thus
all its relatives
;
No. 86.
I
iS
We might proceed
B
still
4~m
=?=F
&c.
w
farther, as,
^
No. 87.
i
WM
The minor
us of
aj?,
^=^^ ^
Efe
W
g,
J[?,
triad, g,
Jj>,
d,
through
reminds
which we are led by changing this the dominant seventh of the key, a^, major.
to
triad,
e[>,
g, h^, into
eb,
Now, if we intend to return to the key, g major, from the key, we will have to follow the contrary course ; that is, to change
95
some minor
triad,
Here
eK
this
and change
it
into c major.
g major
will ^'
'
m
asE
We
must be
of a chord, =t
careful,
ii^^
iM4
TT f
when we
affect
M rr
which can take
them most conveniently ; that is, in that voice which had formerly Thus, in the examples, A and the same tones, without alteration. B,'we have given ib to the alto, which had previously Sb ; and in
the example, C,
strictly
we have
given e^
to the treble,
which'had
eb.
By
adhering
to this rule,
we
we have
started
and gone
direction
;
to those
i.
with
flats.
We
we
are
now
to follow
e.,
from natural
shall
in
change minor
into
major
thirds.
mind
triads,
that in
on the
He must
From
c
modulate
into
more or
remote keys.
major
The minor
major, thus
may lead
to e
major and a
No. 88.
-ste-
^fe
E
Major.
Iee
j^fesEEJ
96
^ ^^
ite
The Minor Triad on
minor
/jf.
# ^^1
A Major.
He iBi=l ^
the third degree to major
e,
minor
cj|,
and
^^^^^^^
E
Major.
No. 89.
P
1
P-
iai
5
1^
ss
p-0ifj^m^^ ^i
C^ Minor.
FB Minor.
fe
;
'=31
5
^1
/ minor.
m^^^^^
B1|
No. 90.
Major.
m^.
"!
9S=y
97
^
s^
I
Fj Minor.
4 J
PP
i f^ i
*
We
seventh
spite
m
as
=r=f
have here introduced such keys as have their dominant connected with some preceding triad. Nevertheless, in
are
given here,
following
The
No. 91.
Fare-well,
thou
bu
sy
world,
(A)
Pare-
1
Jfcfc
r^ i
J-
=EE?=
p-TF=^
Fare--well thou
J^AJ i ^r T
r-vrorld, fate-well,
bu - sy
well, thou
bu - sy
world,
and
may we
nev- er
meet a
gain,
+^^
zk
A :^A and
meet a
-gain,
-^ ii J>
^=
^- Trr^=^
^r
and
may we nev-er
-^.
98
and
may we
nev
-I-
rSzzfccd-.9-'
I
=^
er
er
meet
gam. J
(+)
may
r^rT=rT^
we
nev
-
frT.
gam.
meet
:^=^b
and
fe
may we
nev
-
^
er
meet
gain.
Here
leads
it
prepares the ear for the coming key, and the major triad, a,
e,
most conveniently
to the definitive
e,
key of
is
e major.
At
the
sign
cipal
+,
calls us
back again
performed.
to the prin-
key of c, in which the final But the best course to take, in order
cadence
to
modulations,
is
No. 92.
1.
AND
2.
I
Violins.
Ores.
__J
'
ViOLON.
D.B.
g*3
99
m :^^^^
#
^
f
!.
t^
aft
This fragment
is
^
!
It
&c.
duced
to
two
violins, violoncello,
exemplifies
new melodic
so
as
to to
satisfy
the
demands of the
is
This method of
&c.,
going
remote keys
sonatas,
such
as
quartettes,
symphonies,
&c.
The instrumental compositons of Haydn, Mozart, Beethoven, Hummel, and Mendelssohn, abound with such modulations.
3.
means of modulations.
After every final cadence
the tonic, to
1st.
we
any tone of
make
it
new key.
it
By
the major
third of a
new
we
key a major
c major
third
downward from
Thus, from
we modulate
No.
93.
li
^^^^^^ m T^
Ft4=F^
s^
fe^^
100
-^^
=?=hF
J3
r
&c.
F? / ^
i^ite^ i?^
2nd.
^^p
it
^1
the fundamental
By
of a
new
tonic,
we modulate
No.
94.
i^^^^^ ^^E^s^
i
Itt*
^=r4-
^
i
By
t-
lu
'^ris
^^
&c.
^iSr
ft
fifth,
f
it
3rd.
keeping on the
and making
new
tonic,
we modulate
into a
^m
^=3
fe
No. 95.
f=f-f^^f=^
;
-P
I f=f^-^=*f=p-tn^
I
Ei
:^s^=f=
M^
^^
-0~n--
101
4th.
we may
establish a
new
key on the
No. 96.
4=^4=^
#^^^
^-
^^
?s
^g^
-^-^
&6.
^a=i^u
J^
-f^-fT=F=i=
iS
:e^
5th.
we may
get the
fifth
downward
as the fundamental of a
new minor
key, thus
No. 97.
i EE f^
"f
=5=t^
i^
^?-
-,
f^
-d
ci
r5^
ifc^^^^^
T"
T=^=?=
zfzitS
E&
p-
.l
9e-s
i=Tl^
mi^=F^^^#^^
=fe
102
T r r
ptt
E
and frequently used.
This modulation
eighth measure
is
ivatural,
At
the
we
We
concluded.
6th.
we may
start
from one of
its
tones,
and
please,
No.
98.
\-
fe
i
J.
i=^
-^-
ggP^^
m ^
ii
U_l
^
J.
^^^-= m P^f=^
k
-^^
J. J.
&c.
ji
J.
J.
Ep-p-=TPp=p_^
~-r=T
103
7th.
mote modulations.
we
l^ave
may
get the
new
key, as
No. 99.
I1
Eg
fe^Efe^ttteSE^fe
^.liA ^mi
S
^_i.
j-iL-i
&c.
^e^E
From d major we
which
all
J.
m
t
ti
are led,
by chromatic
new
tonic,
modulation.
But
this repose
el',
on
c is quite arbitrary.
We
might as
et';
new key
part
beginning of a measure, or at
is
accented
to
of
It
advisable, moreover,
to
pay
attention
the
In
may
on
the contrary, the quicker the motion, the longer ought to be the
chromatic run.
8th.
The
ijiusical
rests
104
withoHt retaining any tone to serve us
as-
as-:
No. 100.
I
i
t
full
^g-
^
^
by
and
Em
-4=F^
Here we have a
leads us to expect a continuation f and immediately we continue, in a foreign key. what right f Because this continuation is a
By
it
phrase by
itself^
a&
were
new
up the thread
a
We
ought
to remark,,
section, that
parts, after
We have
selves.
occurrences
may
is
happen, as to be introdniced
There
Observation.
is
Since
is
in
Nos.
1, 2,
3, the stationary
tone
preceded by a
full
finished,
no transition
third,
The
fundamental,
and
fifth,
of a tonic
which
it is
inherent.
7, the tones to
which
we have been
tonic triad,
led, beside
more
4.
We can
105
additional minor seventh, and change every triad into a dominant
chord, as
I
triad,
^ ^ ^31 W
\rsr
we
which
No. 101.
WD
r
.^
m3^^Q.
*
7 I
m
I
~IP^
feU
[!
g^
LT
I^
J
=^
l^i
^ir=^=p^j=j==^J2^^=Z^i pti^is
^^
'I
ii^
'%
^
I
>J
'^
y^
H
[7J
sJ
i t
m
S
f'
""
The
it
succession begins
and we see in
106
We
it
^,
because, if continued,
changes, which
we now
intend to avoid
as
it is
our design
to treat
We will
a
now
In the
we
gqf
new dominant
seventh and a
new
we have gained
give the third
new
flat
at
every resolution.
Our
object
now
is to
its
to elevate the
seventh by a chromatic
instead of progressing
downward
step.
fifth,
has
move up
a full step,
the
fifth is
moves up by a chromatic
second seventh
is
At
we proceed from
first,,
and every
new
Aoxs\,
new
sharp, as
No. 102.
dEE^E^dfe^: fei =^
-^
iE
a
i
Lastly,
i ffcrixiqz F-+r^
^
dom--
^g i
we
proceed
to
107
No. 103
iESa^sEi^SstS i
'^'^t-t-
pE^gj^^ai ^ ^=^
fe?=:.=qh?==iCi:
i f =^ KE
I I
M^iJ:
?=SS:
T
=i^
i-
I
^ie^^
rf
^tJ=^: ?3^
i
P^
At A,
led
it
^e
We
c,
-i-y-
dominant seventh
to
a, c, efc
the dominant seventh resolves to f, a, c, eV, which is the might as well have to the key of Sfe major.
or to a,
f.
moves up
to a, the third
and the
both to
c,
In the case of a,
e^,
it
descends
a step to 67.
to
o^
c,
e^.
Here,
all
the
tones follow their usual course, except the fundamental, which goes
from
its
downward
motion.
this
we had
to place
108
5.
Our
seventh, as far as
In
enharmonic modulations,
we
shall give a
view of
it.
We
seventh
have already remarked, on page 41, that this chord may Thus, the diminished
be changed into the dominant seventh of the parallel major key. Then, in c major, if we lower b a chromatic step in the diminished
seventh
b, d,
f, a^,
it
becomes
c
J]',
major
et".
Thus, from
major
we may suddenly
major
^^
instance,
Mi^\%
II
into
a domi-
follows that
by
ele-
vating the fundamental of the dominant seventh, by a chromatic Thus, in the present step, we convert it into a diminished seventh.
to
return to c major
as,
f^wd^t^i^
Let us now enter
this chord.
1st.
into
some other
interesting combinations of
The
we
elevate a half
may
be,) the
it
we
convert
into
109
dominant seventh, whose
tonic
is
Example
^^^^^=%
We go from
2d.
ic
major
to e major.
The
we
the
a.
fifth
we
obtain
fifth
dominant seventh, whose tonic shall be a fourth below, or a above the preceding one ; as
i
From major
3d.
c,
fes^\>sf>-
i
major g.
if
or major
eV-,
we go
to
The
fifth
being unaltered,
whose
tonic is a
as.
i
We pass
4th.
izs*:
:#
te^
^ 1
we
;
from major c
to
major
5^.
The
we
whose
tonic
^^From major
c
^
we have
regularly three tones
we go
to dl? major.
moving up a half
ary.
step,
we have two
alternatives.
First Alternative.
grees
;
step, or
diminished third.
110
list.
The
as,
-^qS^
i
f
to
From
major or minor
we go
d major.
2d.
All the parts ascend a half step, and lead from e major or
i
iln this
^^ gs^44^
^
is
transformed into
There
is
which
of the
by
a and
base.
Though
first fifth
by some
theorists,
as the
much
better to
comes from a dissonant chord, yet we believe it is avoid it, which is easily done, by causing the dimin-
same funda-
thus
i
3d.
^^g-
i^
=F
step,
diminished third (or enharmonic step), the third a half ^^Pj and the fifth a whole step ; as,
i ^^^
from major or minor c
4th.
to
3
aV.
W
a whole step
;
major
The
as,
^^^^
from major or minor
c to
f major or minor.
Ill
Second Alternative.
three
All the
tones descend;
;
the seventh
sometimes a whole
1st.
The seventh
fifth
a half step
as.
^^^^^
from major or minor
2d.
c to
d major.
as.
The
fifth
note and
a half step
i
from major or minor
3d.
i2=?=
E^
as,
=g
c to
f major or minor.
;
The
a whole step
^=te^ i ^^m m
-t-
m^
We
c to aj? minor.
step,
as,
i
from major or minor
Lastly,
J25=
^^5fe
cl'.
c to
major
sequences,
to
we can use the diminished seventh in passages They may enable as we did the dominant seventh.
all
it
or
us
scale.
flats,
when
it is
Exam-
No. 104.
^f^^^
Upward.
112
No. 105.
^
They may
aimed at;
as,
\b'
Dovrawatd.
fe.^
if
some sharp-tonic
is
No. 106.
Upward
i
No. 107.
^^^^^
In No. 104
Downward.
we
in
No.
to
a major or minor.
common
to
change the
half step.
last
;
fundamental
which
for
easily effected,
last
Thus,
example, the
changed
into the
^m.
In these sequences,
steps, so that
part,
^
If
all
^m
by half
Finally,
we
by only glancing
is
There
necessary
modulations.
to
We
we
have
to
ment ; and,
first
all, to
piano music.
demand
the greatest
acumen
in
113
keep firmly
to the
Of
It
composer
to
know
who
sitions.
Enharmonic Modulations.
Sounds, which are identical in pitch, but placed on different
degrees, are called enharmonic.
as forming a uniform sound
;
Thus,
is,
ctt
and
dl?
are considered
that
d\>. But here theorists have followed mathematicians, who, when they find in an operation
cjj
is
make
if
but an unimportant
differ-
and proceed as
the case here.
is
Such
is
The
enharmonic sounds
garded
;
so minute, that
so, for
is,
indeed, to be disreis
and by doing
The word
enhar-
monic
is
which
is, fitting,
According
to these notions
Enharmoni- ~%
cally
-fe-^
1^
is
equal to
^ry ^^
-
-#=s
equal to
/U=5fe^
The Diminished
equal
Foiieth.
i -^
-I
Its:
or 11^
114
The Extended Thled,
i
I
The Peefeot
equal to
-^-
i
The Majob Third.
1
-JT
equal to
orHlt^h
Fotteth,
i
The Shabp Fodeth,
is
equal to ^Bk-
*
Fifth.
The Diminibhed
is
i
The Diminished
Fifth,
equal to
fe
or-
P
i
I
^
ft*
equal to
^=
Wsi
The Minoe
^
Sixth.
The Peefeot
Fifth,
is
The Diminished
equal to
1
Sixth.
The Extended
Fifth,
is
^
The Diminished
Sixth,
-
equal
to^^
or-
i
Fifth.
The Peefeot
is
i
i i i
<*
E^
IS*
equal
"$The Extended
Fifth.
The Minos
Sixth,
is
equal to
or-
pr
Sixth,
-bs-
The MijoE
-J^
The Extended
Sixth,
equal
-i
E^
The Minoe Seventh.
<*>
is
equal to
=^s
115
Of
first
these enharmonic changes, the most used are those of the exsixth,
the
the second,
becoming a diminished
seventh, and the third being changed into a minor seventh in the
above
list,
for
doing so:
first,
is
frequently used
which
Maometto Secondo,
in the overture to
La Gazza
seems
The mischievous
to set
Italian
have pur-
posely
mocked
at the prohibition.
sufficient, in
our opinion,
A.
We
on
this chord,
We
shall
The
hence,
it
and by changing alternately this second into a minor third, such inversion forms a new diminished seventh, affording the composer
the
different keys.
The
first
inversion,
w-
116
by
the
change of
into a^,
W^::
and enables us
seventh
is
to
modulate into
minor
able to
we
No. 108.
C
Minor.
i?=^^
I
@fe
JS
-I
:g= -m:
a
'i
g~
r-^
s '--(a
''
;^
e- ^i
'I
iEE
^^
inversion.
Eb Major.
i^
fet
I
i
'^1
I
^
l^::
UMi=^te^-4^
=
i
5 ^
r
?
'si
g
The second
^
by the change of both g^
diminished seventh.
into
oj?,
and of i
into
cl*,
we
gain the
117
which
affords us
^ major.
Eb Minor.
No. 109.
^^ Trrr
ige
J:^
1
^^
i
^
I
G[j
S-l
Major.
I
I
fe
The
id=^^=^i^ir^'=T^
f^
^5
t-F^I
i
third inversion,
is
enharmonically
to
f%
minor or major, or
to the
No. 110.
m ^^
^m
A
Ma]or.
fct
=?==
:S--3r^
i%=F
y=
118
F^ Major.
i^
ite
^=
w
iS
a^i^ ^ *s^
A ^ jipT^y^
ss
- s^
It
is
but then
it
is
necessary
may
as.
No. 111.
MOBZEATO.
119
encumbered with
accidentals.
;
This
is
particularly the
case in
passages, or sequences
as,
No. 112.
i^^^^^fc
m^
At
b^,
ks-
followed by the chord, gif major, with eight sharps, which would have involved us in an infinity of signatures. Instead of this, we
(at
A)
into
e\>,
g,
into
keys with
less signatures.
Sometimes, however, the enharmonic changes increase the numIn general, the enharmonic
If the composer
wishes
sharps
to
give his
assist
may
duce an opposite
work a more lively character, the keys with him in carrying out such a design. Flats proeffect, by imparting a gloomy tint to the harto
mony.
B.
changes,
seventh.
that
In the synoptical table (previously given) of the enharmonic we have seen that the extended sixth becomes a minor
On
we have been
the
extended
itself
which constitute the dominant perfect fifth wherefore, the change-^of the dominant seventh into the ; seventh Of course, when thus extended sixth, comes in quite naturally.
^just
the
same
intervals
down
this sixth.
interesting modulations, if
we
key,
we may
120
In the following examples, the enharmonic note
is
No. 113.
From C
to
Minor.
^?3=^i
^
or
w I
From C Major to B
Major.
ft^
pW%.^=4t
1
From G
to
A^ Magor.
i^
-o-e-
#^^ 3==
^
^ ^^
From C
S m
I
to
Miyor.
i
9i=f^
Vr-h^ I =^P
M^
Ij
J
J
~^
121
At A,
d,
e{|,
the dominant seventh represents the extended sixth, which resolves into the perfect cadence of minor h. the
g,
h,
At B,
that the extended sixth (minor seventh) resolves into the perfect
cadence of h major.
At C,
the
harmony goes
which,
to the relative
to _/ major, which, changed enharmondominant seventh, closes with the major key, e major, with
four sharps.
Now,
sixth,
it
In
No. 114.
i:
122
m i4 I f
r
^i=i
'T
i
zoa
-fTi"
5tt
E*^
its
At
oally,
major.
This,
effect.
when
properly done,
is
may
be used in
They
musician.
shall
We
this subject,
and we
C.
We
call so
on any sharp or
so as to enable
flat
itself to the
composer,
Fre-
him
makes
best
it
it,
according
fancy.
to
Cadences and
half-cadences
the
opportunities
accomplish such
modulations.
No. 115.
m^^^^
-p-
-r-r-^
123
^-J^M
is
The
first
first
The
and,
part,:of the
remaining on
it
up
for &!?;
J!?,
at the
same
d,
f^.
corresponding
pg^fe^^^i^^^i
J.
.Jz
1^:
Tr
ffi
At
fflj?,
1^ ^^^- S5 s
Efe
;
the end of the second measure, the three tones of the chord,
ffll',
eK take their corresponding enharmonics that is, the chord, eK becomes g^, J|}, dl^ the dominant triad of cjf after which, the harmony gets into the key of major a. Unisons may, in many instances, afibrd effective means of operac, c,
;
The
giving up
concern about harmony, takes hold, of some melodic design, and develops it with the enharmony, in full vocal or orchesall
tral blast.
Example
No. 117.
124
i^p^^WN^ MXn
ig 1^
We
^.^^^^j<jS^
#=
^^^^^^^
i^1---^ -
r-t-T-
have
stated,
final
cadence, or even
after a repose
on any
tonic
;
we can
third of a
new
that
is,
preceding key.
This modulation
to
may
more variety
to the composition.
Example
No. 118.
^^h^^d
I,
-^-fi
I
I
&
=j-r
I
'
'^
'
r'
r"
m 9^M
-rr
^=^
J ^ ^^^
:^
E^
J
I
=w
^ ^^m ^^E^^
:i=i-
ji
i
i
5
44i:^^J-i
g
5 L
ig~
^I
125
As
it
This
^,
of the tonic,
flat-tonic is
into
aK
its corresponding sharp one, which becomes the leading tone of the tonic, a half step higher. For instance, from a{ tonic (being mentally changed into gji) we can immediately go into major aj^ (three sharps), from dl? major to
enharmonically consid-
tit]
An
example
ject.
In a vocal
would be proper
to
thus
No. 120.
^s
J..
:l
d.
126
m
singer
fc=d:
m m
never
4t"
_
2
6
h^,
next
to the third
h.
who has
fails to
to perform'
the whole
may
by the composer.
may
But
in both cases
we
obtain the
same
tonic as in the
The
No. 121.
In
God's word will
I re
- joice,
In
the
Lord's
IW^
i^
-^^
^=r^=;h=hf^i
=#^
S3 Eg
r
.
In
God's
I
word
will
^
'f
I""
re
joioe.
word will
comfort me,
ft.t
I f==F=pr^T=^PT
.i_i^_
fe
fti^
S^i =F^
-d-d-
sa jgpg^E^E^^f
the Lord's
lA^
?
comfort me.
-^z~f~w
In the Lord's
word will
127
comfort me,
In
|i
e^
word
will I
Jw
^^^^S ^
-^ J
J^
_i
[|j
^v
comfort me, In
God's
word
will
re
joice,
In
will I
com- fort
M^^^^ii
I
s
4:
com- fort
re
joice,
In
will I
me,
will
com-fort
me.
^^m. S s^
-JU-.
J
J_J. ^^
s
^sJ
Ji i
=e^
i^E
com -fort me.
e{',
me,
At
the fourth
measure of
this
example, the
6t[,
tonic,
becomes the
third of
the
el'
dominant
to
et|.
triad,
d|,
/j|,
passes from
The current
from which
into
g:}f,
it
turns to aV.
b^, d, f,
which brings the harmony from a^ to a minor. Finally, all the parts verge to e^and get the final cadence in the principal key.
The foregoing remarks, with the examples, have unfolded the whole matter of enharmonic modulations. For the practical use of them, we refer the student to the works of the great writers.
128
They
will give
The
Pkdal-Point.
On
pages 217 and 218 of our author, the origin and object of the
It
remains now
to
say by
pedal-point.
The
proceeding
harmony above the sustained tonp should be considered Viewed thus, it must have a regular base as if it were to be performed without the assisting pedal. This is required, because the parts above contrast by their motion to the stillness of the immovable tone below.
the
as an independent whole.
drawn ?
From
by
those
keys that are nearest related to the pedal, avoiding those in which,
common
and
last
eleva-
tion or depression.
is
the fundamental
of the
first
The
following
is
sample of a pedal-construction
No. 122.
^A^^ ^ r^TTfTf^-^Ai^^
^=^Ti
gE
5
'.
i
t
irh^
-
E^
F5b=t
129
i
^:
We
-o
1
^
TTa
1-
f= I
f-
g=aP=f
fulfilling
Now,
No. 123.
j=j^^d=j=d^.i=M^=j=^ i ^f=n=ffTTfv^r^~r~r--
130
i
a
*
9
8
)i
^
l
=i==
i^
:^
The
to the
pedal
may
and submits
no
down
dominant.
said
on
further explanation.
to
is
outer pedal.
The
reason of this
is
obvious.
for these
unpleasant intervals ;
so,
must be removed as
far as possible
and buried
The inward
pedal
commonly
as,
131
No. 124.
i -/-.-^-^
ih
^=
In the following,
we make
to the
by which we have
is
what
is
which
is
laid
r-3^
--^-^
PLAQAL CADENUB.
132 At
tlie
harmony
suhdominant
conclusion
We
is
call the
which
used by
effec-
is
In such
to
new
It
tonic or domi-
point.
to develop
as.
No. 126.
f ^ m^^wrwn
^=?^ ^E
? i
^S44^^44m
f
We have said that
316, and
^3
the inward pedal
is
11
placed on the dominant.
Nos. 306 and 308 of our author, in consequence of the signature, seem to have the sustained tone upon the tonic. But the ib in No.
f^
is
in 318,
spite of their
There
common among
Here
it is
(at
A)
133
No. 172.
JAIN T e:*
^
^n.^:
fli
g*
This
is
.snj gi
Such a cadence
is
^s
in the
like
to the tonic.
made use of
in the Allegro,
and the
APPENDIX
f
H.
The
but
below.
it is
sometimes made
to
ascend a step
when
May
be, that
but this
for
musical instruction.
The
is
student ought
be taught according
to the rules
to break, before
difficulties
he
acknowledged
to
of the counterpoint.
No.
we would
JO.
-2:
z^sz
APPENDIX
Suspension
First.
is
I.
must be prepared;
e.,
Second.
It
must be resolved
which
it
i.
e.,
it
to
stretches
must
voice or instrument finally enter upon the proper tone of the chord.
Thieik
may
:
The
latter
sometimes
fills
No. 128.
i i
At D,
it is
?=E=
i
TS-
1
r
%^
^.
s^=f=
r
is
f
fills
r
;
at
E,
all
equal
at
F, the suspension
here.
is
right.
But
No. 129.
^-S-
=j
-J4^i-^
136
there
is
no suspension.
The
tones,
c,
being
shorter than the tones following them, the minims are merely appog;
giatures,
to this,
No. 130.
EE
Fourth.
tone
-^
^
may
measure.
^^^
&c.
The
This
preparatory tone
must
fall
cented part.
peculiar to suspensions.
In
this; also,
they
disagree with the chords of the seventh, in which the dissonant tone
in the
P^^ W r
i
in
4-
lies
on the accented
part,
and the
suspension In the
common
2> and .2., the first beat is In the quadruple time, the first and
the
the
first
and fourth not. In triple time, and second beats are often accented, the third is not. In
distributed in the
same way
When there are four of them in a measure, as in 2 ^ the accents are divided, as they are in the comcan be placed on quavers.
mon quadruple
time
i.
e.,
the
first
In
as
time;
i.
e.,
first
and second
said
is not.
What
is
of the
compounds, such
and
-S.
Examples
137
of suspension in compound time will be given on
161, 162, 163.
pages, 150,
Fifth.The suspension
This
is
necessarily a dissonance
need preparation
is is
and
resolution.
not susnot
pension.
any
any suspension.
Na
131.
^
But the next
+^=^
No. 132.
i ^^^^^^fe
is
tions
for
lie
a tone of a
to
which
it
is
not indigenous,
The
resolve
peculiar
such suspensions as
It
by an ascending
e.,
may
be replied, that there are instances of suspehsion resolving from below. There are indeed passages which, at t"he first sight,
seem
to
contain,
such suspensions
it
to the
notions
now
familiar to us,
will be
is
real
suspensions.
The
following
Reicha's Treatise
=w=
ii
ia;
?
i
^
1 1
this.
first,
There
is
no suspension in
we have
usual
way
of resolutions above
the
sustaining
Here, again.
No. 134.
i
at the
m
first
;
fci
LJI
^m
at the
fesHg
beginning of the
measure, no suspension can be found.
h forms an appoggiature
so does the
same tone
beginning
the
alto-part.
As
'
No. 135.
i ^ i ^f
r
which represents exactly No. 134.
atures, they are inexplicable.
^
passages of ascending
When
We
139
discords resolving from below.
now and
then
but
these
is
of more liberty than the severe one which must now be the main
Sixth.
"When a tone
it,
of a chord
is
suspended,
it
can never be
as
when
it
is
never allowed
to
introduce, in
No. 136.
A
I
-^
6
J
8
I
At A,
suspended
But
at B, the
Seventh.
Suspensions
fifths
are
fall
on a faulty
is objection-
successions of
and octaves,
No. 137.
^
for there exists a succession of fifths
^
r
140
treble,
which
at
is
apparently disguised
;
middle part
but if
we
The harmony
is
more admissible
it
We will
have
No. 138.
i
Here
also
^U^
kh-
ff
it
No. 139.
m
there
is
Jf J
,1
JtJ-J
rff "W
at
an example of wrong suspensions, as they arise from a can be seen E, which are
still
succession of octaves, as
worse
We
him
to
avoid a great
portance.
1.
in a matter
which
is
of ma,terial im-
in the Triads.
Thus
tions
it
we know
is,
use
till
we became
the
with
its
Now we
have
to
do so
1.
Uninveeted Triad.
to the fifth,
Every tone of a triad can be retarded by suspensions. With regard which when retarded gives no dissonance, but simply a
we
it,
unless
sus-
that
pended
at
No. 140.
4^
*T
ST
g
141
When
the third
is
suspended,
it
fifth,
called i i:
No. 141,
in
two ways
by the upper
ously with the suspension tone, or by the base itself. In the first case it forms a chord consisting of a third, fifth, and ninth, called
No. 142
I
In the second case,
it
and perfect
fourth, called f z i, as
No. 143.
i
When
is
t
is
r 7
suspended in one of
the,
the fundamental
upper parts,
it
2.
The
third
suspension
No. 144.
7^6
142
The
hase
would introduce a
The
tone-
may
itself,
when
upper
parts,
it
^
When
the base-tone
is
No. J45.
retarded
by
the base
:
itself, it
forms a
fifth,
called | S
&
3.
No. 146.
TSP
The
No. 147.
mi:^^^^ r f
f
The
fifth
No. 148.
143
This suspension can take place only
in cadences or half-ca-
preparation. In the other cases the preparation of the fourth excludes any suspension
whatever.
The base-tone here is retarded only in the upper parts. forms a chord composed of a fourth, sixth, and ninth. It
called g *:
It
is
^^^
No. 149.
Ff
r r
We
shall
now
give some
exercises on the
employment of the
suspensions in the triads and their inversions, that the student may,
after them, exert his
own
industry.
No. 150.
_J_j
i
J^Vi
i
I
ite
^^
J
-
i--i
^^
M
-?^-+
4-^^
(I
-i.-^
I
mr
r
I
"
4-
r
%
ifcrp:
^^^^^^
f
ff
r
144
E^^
I
~Lrf
-^ if
^
I
is
~^
9~P
^
i=
I
--f=^
'
^ i_
A Jr^ i^
r f
6
^S
I
r r
r-
-r
Q
I
jT^=bJ
J
|
=i=^
^^^
5
-r
rr
p
^ffT
I
%
-7-
- e
^^^
r^ s
? I
^^^M ^^ rtf^
g
t
i""
EiE
^
I
fii
J?
^^*
sj
E^
f^^
-^T
I5t=i:
145
No. 151.
^^
e 7
+ 5 4
3
^^ ^
iE
rrrp_i.
1
^^d ^r
J
i:^r
>l^ij d^ ^^
fTrf==trn^^=^
i
g
?-
- 5-
u^^^^^ ^
i
f
T^=rr=^
^
I 6
^r
5-
5-^j,|
When
ascertain
to
what particular
direction
each suspen-
He
(7)
146
tion
is
an inversion.
point.
And what
inversion
is
a pedal-
He must
know
make
and more
profit-
2.
The chord of
class, in
dominant seventh.
The fundamental
;
tone
it
is
is,
such a suspension
is
i
resolved to the seventh.
the dominant seventh
real suspension.
is
l
But
fitself,
and
this is a
The
sixth,
suspension of the
It is
fifth
and seventh.
called a \ chord.
i
The
fifth,
^
t
^ ^
it
j-
is
suspension tone from the seventh in order to avoid the close dis-
chord
i
This suspension
nant seventh.
is
^^
*
the one most usually
employed
in the domi-
147
The
composed of a second,
and
sixth, called 2
P
1.
t
First Inveksion.
The
the
first
first
diminished
and
sixth.
possible in
not be suspended in the upper parts, for the reason assigned in the
previous directions.
The
suspension of
it
.the third
but seldom.
cautions.
Nevertheless,
The
close dissonances
f, g,
i
should be avoided
;
^
for,
Tgg-
constructed as
it
is
But
if
we remove
i
it
m.
^=
ss4 I
3
T
5
5efiective.
becomes
satisfactory,
and even
The
and
the chord)
fifth,
by the
composed of a second,
fourth,
called |:
i
This suspension
satisfactory to
is
-r
It
si 1=
)
foregoing, and
more
the
ear.
148
fof the aWaflgemetlt of its tones, as the dissonances lie at
a distance
2.
Second iNtfiRSiON.
This inversion
of the sixth
is
is
The
suspension
It
forms a
i^
It is practicable,
a^
whatever
may
The
parts.
forms a chord of a
and ninth,
called S
i
be attended
to.
j^
^-.
^^-
given in 1 must
The
suspension of the
It
base' tone
by the base
itself,
is
very
would be thus:
P
Two
J=
=t:
I*
5
3.
Third Inversion.
fourth,
and major
effective suspensions
can be Used in
this inversion-"
augmented
fourth.
149
The suspension of the sixth gives a chord consisting of a major second, augmented fourth, and seventh, called 2
i^
The
fifth,
?
:
and
r
that
da^E^
All the suspensions which can be formed in the dominant seventh can likewise be used in the other sevenths, with only this difference,
in the latter the fundamental can be retarded, both by the upper parts and by the base itself. So, we do not think it necessary to enter upon any particular explanation concerning these
sevenths.
the
All
to
the
foregoing
the
directions
are
enough
to
enable
in
student
use
same
will
any
seventh whatever.
We
now
No. 152.
-^^-^-^
\-
J^J
ist
ft
ga m
'f^^' =iJ=x^
J.
^
H
'i
f-T
S6
150
AJ-ii
^
No. 153
ANOANTS.
-r^-
^
I Is
d=
*
i
^
??
^5
urn^'
T^-
a^^
^ss;
ni
^ m
2^
^=^
=5
^F??c
il5-
^^-^ atitf
Tt
^M '^^-S-T*
^=Srzi!i
^
^^^^
m
No. 154.
^
E^
^m
^
iE
-J^^
-Jc:i
^^
!!
151
J~j_4-J^-^-j_J-j-,^-
iT
We
him
J ^
!
i<
iJ ^
-SF
U-^ ^
r-T r-r-r-rS
p^^^^
ii
If
to ascertain
their inversions.
We
he reads the
exercise No. 153, to look at the previous direction, No. 4th, on the
compound
which
it is
derived.
There
to
is
the
if
Next
the
fifth
may
be successfully suspended,
apt to be suspended
i
it is
^^ J
t
is
*:
!|*
*-
This suspension
152
3.
Double Suspensions,
suspensions in only one part of our have them in two parts simultaneously, in other words, instead of one we will have two suspensions meeting together; but no more than two can be used at the same
far
Thus
exercises.
Now we
time.
Of course,
all
when
a single suspen.
must be attended to, when two occur simultaneously. (Directions 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6,) Pages 135, 137, 138, ISff.
sion is used
As
to the resolution,
we must
that
that suspension
which introduces a new dissonance. the opinion of Reicha, in his treatise on harmony.
must resolve
first
Such
is
'A
i
us with two different features.
c,
itself to
we
d, a second.
The second
same
ninth,
dis-
g, a ; but the chord of the second vanishing gives us a new sonance, viz a seventh, J, a, with a in the treble.
:
The
to
In
all
Hercf
i
we have two
introducing a
^
)
I
But
the tone a, of the chord f, a, c, prolonged to the following e, g, c, continues only the whole chord f, a, c, on to the beginning of the second chord ; and g, next to a, the intended suspension, instead of
new chord by
resolving a,
is,
by
its
shortness, rather
153
over the base.
Nay,
c,
far
second
in the chords of
With one
This
is
For
this reason,
No. 155.
Exercises 1^=^
on.
Double Suspensions.
I
EEEfc
.1i-A. J
J-
~J
i
-J
p V:^r^
^-
^m
^^tSz^:
^
i
-i^-j-
^
6
^TTr
i2=5=
m
I
(7*)
154
No. 156.
^
fe^
ll!
_ 8
3
^.Z^ % "^TTT
I
^=J=4
4-h4
^
. 1
^^ rrTF^
55_
5
II
3
5 6
f^^^^^^g
5
1^
r F
*
li
3.
6
-7-
8 -
A New
Feature of Resolution
in
the StrsPENSioNS.
In our preceding
talces place
is still
way
in existence.
Now, we
will
on a
diflferent
chord.
No. 157.
\k
].
i
the/ (at A) of the
J==^
c, e,
g;
155
and in the
chord g,
the
a,
b,
like
d.
manner should
c, e,
but in
The chords do
J
not influence
it.
Here, again,
i
in the |, in
f 'r c-^i
I
which the
third is retarded
by
suspension had
to resolve
on the dominant
The same
suspension
i
tion
;i=4
*f=^
minor key.
The
its
resolu-
had
to
take place on g,
b, d. c,
course
dom-
to successions of
No. 158.
=i5
&e.
i-
But with the supensions we can use the same succession, in which the ninth occurs stripped of the sevenths, and steps more freely.
156
^5
^r-A
S=-st
*
f
'.
'.
or
5-9
or
&e.
-^- -i
&a.
f5
Here the
was expected
to
take place
on the sustaining-tone of the base, which introduces every measure. But by the progressing of the base, a fifth below at A, a third below
at
at C,
By
we can
obtain
-=?=
i
The
as:
'h-J
J-tJ
j^k
rf
minor
;
or extended sixths
to
major
sixths,
and
vice versa,
i
From
1^^ i^ r
the above examples,
it
s
!*
i-=d
^
can take
its
157
way
proper tone.
peculiarities
There are
still
some
resolution,
can be permitted
its
to pass
is,
through one
due, that
the resolution
resolution,
can be postponed by placing, between the suspension and one or more chord-tones.
Thus
here
^^^^^^^
A
B
r r5
"
At A,
new chord
find
finds its
way between
suspension and
At B, we
and
its
resolution.
resolution, pass
^^
-'p-^t
^^^^
ite
'^
i?
^^
m^
m.
1=
158
The
dtnple
the resolution the voice passes through several tones of the chord.
to
from an
No. 159.
I
^^=^
1s>-^=
^^^^^
^m
it
-fT
&e.
t-:^
is
much
as possible.
As
to
we
many
of them
we
think proper.
base, also, is allowed to step from one
The
This
is
tone to another.
suspenthe
But
in doing so,
we
we change
No. 160.
^^ ^
^i^Ti
r^
'
'
"li
"
159
We
and
have here a
:
g.
The upper
it
parts
slurs
in the
its
strongly the
movement;
is
suspension,
which
| at
A, and I
At A,
passing through the chord-tones d, g, b, strikes g, the fundamental of I ; at B, it strikes c, the fundamental of I 1, before moving
c, e, c.
But now
No. 161.
^
I
is
iy^^
changed
(at
is
D)
the suspension
destroyed, according to
the
rule
dissonance.
The
for
slur,
is
In the above,
thus
No. 162.
^_
IP
g-
-S)~TSr
^F^
mpE^^i^i^-r^t^
3
m
I
&e.
m^
character of suspension,
It
as here
160
No. 163.
M
sf^gr^l^=^=^=
^^^
I
sr^^~^^^
^ ^tg
different
-"^
&0.
^^
But in the
last case, if there
instrument parts would have to restore the suspension with the slur.
effect.
However
the sus-
pensions are equally maintained entire; and though, in the No. 163,
the
measure
is
differ
materially,
still
as genuine in
it
as in the preced-
ing ones.
harmony.
161
No. 164.
I
iilz
F
^ -f-
^
I
nr^P^
l
i=3z
^H' J^.T?f
1^
J=^^=S5g^i=rf^
itE
tz
*r&fc1-
.i^^^
-rmjr
6 9
^ ^Se^
6
9
^^^^iii
lyJi 1
T
-*T-'
jS-'Q
s^m
5
G a
feEE^;^;
5
4 +
5 7
162
^m
No. 165.
-J-i^J
J-rJ
Ie
^
I
^-y-^-<=-
fTFT^^ -^1
-=4-12-
3^
5
i;iLL
J-i-^
g "
j_i j f-r^rrr,^rTTr^
,
=^^-
^ 1-^3 T &5
i
7
i
I
No. 166.
f^
E5=i:
1=
t-
-I-
163
k4^
-^
^^^^^
In the foregoing exercises on suspensions, particular attention has been paid, especially in compound measure, that each beat should be carefully marked and distinct; that when one or two parts
stretch
other parts
over from one beat to another, one or even two of the move up or down to the sustaining tones. This pro
intelligible to the hearers.
and more
because
We
insist
upon
this point,
it is
APPENDIX
No
tone
J.
this
Beethoven's fragment.
dji,
The
If a
cjf,
at the be-
melody adorned with appoggiatures or grace-notes be reversed and sent to the base, the same ornaments still remain in the base, and preserve the same character. To make it plain, we will restore this melodic design to the treble part, from which it has been detached by Beethoven.
tt s
F?=
--ft
l,_p,,-^
it
is
impossible to discover
The tones
itt,
cjf
and
cj{.
djf
the other on
The
lent to this
p^^^f^^m^
since the appoggiature takes
diately succeeds
tion
it.
its
Now
the base.
To show
165
in the base, and the fragment of Beethoven, above quoted,
we
will
Nozze
di Figaro.
in this
manner
fe
-
'^^^f^^'^i
^
&c.
9^~J
What
It is
=^
entrusted
by Mozart
to the part
of the base.
We
iind in
it
all
the
requisites of a suspension
whereas,
we
refer
him
to the
An-
dante introduction of Grluck's admirable overture to IpJiigenie en Aulide, in which the great German master indulges in suspensions,
APPENDIX
Beethoven, our author
ing e
is
K.
an evident mistake.
The
sustain-
a.
The
though the
now and
upper
parts.
The
tones of a, f^, h, (beginning of the second to the seventh of the second degree of major
h, is
whose fundamental,
This seventh
rea,
b.
which begins the second measure, and arising from the retained a of the preceding chords, does not form here any suspension it
;
is
seventh.
tone,
any suspension
is
it
is
to
be
found
Beethoven's
cannot be a
fragment,
But
this
suspension, since
is
mere grace-note.